Test Bank For Electrical Wiring Residential 21st Edition by Ray C. Mullin, Phil Simmons, Derek Vigst by ACADEMIAMILL

Date: TESTClass: BANK Electrical Wiring Residential 21st Edition by Ray C. Test Bank For Mullin, Phil Simmons, Vigstol All Vigstol Chapters 1-33 Electrical Wiring Residential 21st Edition by RayDerek C. Mullin, Phil Simmons, Derek Name:

Chapter 1-33 Chapter_01_General Information for Electrical Installations 1. The open-circuit voltage between the two terminals of a single-pole switch on a lighting circuit when the switch is in the OFF position is ____. a. Zero b. 60 volts c. 120 volts d. 240 volts ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Safety in the Workplace QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/11/2023 5:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/12/2023 4:54 AM 2. Working on equipment with the power turned on can result in burns, serious injury or ____. a. death b. an outage c. a short circuit d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Safety in the Workplace QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/11/2023 5:20 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/11/2023 5:21 PM 3. Working on electrical equipment requires insulated shoes, face shields and ______. a. rubber gloves b. good light c. no disturbance d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Personal Protective Equipment QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/11/2023 5:21 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:01 AM 4. For the most part, the safest practice includes tagging, locking the disconnecting, and _______. a. turning power off b. getting briefing c. having a helper d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: It’s the Law! QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/11/2023 5:22 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/11/2023 5:23 PM 5. The harmful component of an electrical circuit is _______. a. Voltage b. Current c. Body resistance d. Moisture ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Safety in the Workplace QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/11/2023 5:23 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 4:34 AM 6. Many organizations, trade organizations, manufacturers, and others offer training on the NEC and electrical safety. Among them are National Electrical Contractors (NECA.ORG), Underwriters Laboratory (UL.COM) and ________. The International Association of Electrical Inspectors (IAEI.COM) ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Training QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/11/2023 5:26 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/11/2023 5:27 PM 7. Many government organizations offer publications and useful information on electrical safety. Among them CDC.GOV, Dept. of Energy, and _______. OSHA.GOV ANSWER: POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

REFERENCES: Training QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/11/2023 5:27 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/22/2023 8:11 AM 8. OSHA Training Institute offers outreach training programs of interest to electricians, contractors, and instructors. The basic safety courses for general construction safety and health are the OSHA _____and OSHA ____ courses. (see OSHA.GOV) a. 10 hour, 30 hour b. 2 hour, 4 hour c. 6 hour, 8 hour d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Training QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/11/2023 5:29 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/11/2023 5:30 PM 9. The Electrical Safety Foundation International (ESFI) (http://www.electrical-safety.org) offers mostly free material, simple-to-understand electrical safety material, and _______. some downloadable material ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Training QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/11/2023 5:31 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 4:36 AM 10. The NEC is published by the National Fire Protection Association. To remain as up-to-date as possible, it is revised every _______. a. 2 years b. 3 years c. 4 years d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: National Electrical Code® (NEC®) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

DATE CREATED: 8/13/2023 2:49 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/13/2023 3:05 PM 11. NEC has been adopted in all 50 states as the basis for electrical systems. However, each state can develop their own special version, make amendments to the document, and _______. adopt older editions ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: National Electrical Code® (NEC®) QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/13/2023 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 4:39 AM 12. NEC Article 90 says, in part: This Code is not intended as a _____ or an _____ for untrained persons. a. design specification, instruction manual b. how-to book, introductory c. workbook, informational reference d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: National Electrical Code® (NEC®) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/13/2023 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 12:24 AM 13. The NEC also states, in Article 90: Compliance therewith and proper maintenance result in an installation that is essentially free from hazard but not necessarily adequate for good service or future expansion of electrical use or _______. a. efficient and convenient b. easy and guaranteed c. sufficient and safe d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: National Electrical Code® (NEC®) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/13/2023 3:09 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 4:38 AM 14. In addition to states, local municipalities or even inspection agencies can make ____ or ____ to the national code. a. local amendments, changes Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

b. local suggestions, subtractions c. language changes, dimension changes d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: National Electrical Code® (NEC®) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/13/2023 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/13/2023 3:10 PM 15. The NEC is divided into an introduction and nine chapters. Wiring of _______is mostly covered in Chapters 1, 2, 3, and 4, which apply generally. a. commercial buildings b. spas and hot tubs c. special equipment d. dwellings ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Code Arrangement QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/13/2023 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 12:28 AM 16. _______apply(ies) to special occupancies, special equipment, or other special conditions and may supplement or modify this or earlier Chapters. a. Chapters 2, 3, 4 b. Chapter 9 c. Chapters 5, 6, 7 d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Code Arrangement QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/13/2023 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 8:38 AM 17. The NEC is full of requirements that are safety related. Another is NFPA 70E Electrical Safety in the Workplace. NFPA 70E ____________. a. is voluntary b. is endorsed by OSHA c. can be substituted for the NEC Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: It’s the Law! QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/13/2023 3:13 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 7:06 AM 18. According to NFPA 70E, circuits and conductors are not considered to be safe to work on until ________ places them in an electrically safe condition. a. the boss b. a law enforcement officer c. a qualified person d. a project leader ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: It’s the Law! QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/13/2023 3:14 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/13/2023 3:15 PM 19. The U.S. Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) regulations are the law when it comes to safety in the workplace. Key topics in the standard include wiring methods, hazardous (classified) locations, and __________. ANSWER: wiring design and protection POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: It’s the Law! QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/13/2023 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/13/2023 3:16 PM 20. OSHA 1910.399 defines a qualified person as “One who has received training in and has demonstrated skills and knowledge in the _______ of electric equipment and installations and the hazards involved.” a. installation b. construction and operation c. maintenance d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: It’s the Law! QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/13/2023 3:18 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/13/2023 3:18 PM 21. OSHA offers safety courses referring to personal protective equipment (PPE). These include such items as ________. a. ear protection b. fireproof hats c. face plates d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Personal Protective Equipment QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/13/2023 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 12:30 AM 22. Several communities, counties, and/or states require electricians and electrical contractors to be licensed. Minimum qualifications might include _______. a. education b. advanced training c. employment d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Licensing and Permits QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/13/2023 3:20 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 4:42 AM 23. To maintain a valid license, many licensing agencies require ______. a. working for another licensee b. union membership c. continuing education d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Licensing and Permits QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/13/2023 3:22 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/13/2023 3:23 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

24. Quite often, a community will have a “Residential Only” license, limiting activity to _____. a. low voltage b. signal circuits c. lighting branches d. house wiring ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Licensing and Permits QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/13/2023 3:23 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 12:27 AM 25. Permits are a means for a community to permanently _____ to be done and _____. a. record electrical work, who is doing the work b. homeowner c. accept fees d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Licensing and Permits QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/13/2023 3:24 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 7:19 AM 26. Usually for electrical projects, permits must be issued _________. a. after starting the job b. during the job c. prior to starting the job d. anytime during the job ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Licensing and Permits QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/13/2023 3:25 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/13/2023 3:26 PM 27. Electrical inspectors are usually up to date on NEC and local rules, and may correct the electrician. For any corrections that must be done, inspectors should always give a reference ______. a. verbally Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

b. preferably in writing c. by telephone d. in person ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Citing Code References QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/13/2023 3:26 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/13/2023 3:27 PM 28. Electrical inspectors are the authority having jurisdiction in most cases. That means they _________. a. interpret Code rules b. enforce OSHA rules c. require changes to completed work d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Citing Code References QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/13/2023 3:27 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/13/2023 3:28 PM 29. Electrical inspectors are not fallible. They may be part-time or also have the responsibility for ______. a. plumbing b. energy conservation c. other areas d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Building Codes QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/13/2023 3:29 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/13/2023 3:29 PM 30. The International Association of Electrical Inspectors (IAEI) is a nonprofit organization. Membership includes __________. a. electrical inspectors b. handymen c. trainees d. all of the above Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: International Association of Electrical Inspectors QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/13/2023 3:30 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/13/2023 3:31 PM 31. A major goal and activity of the IAEI is to _________. a. improve the understanding of the NEC b. review jobs c. approve permits d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: International Association of Electrical Inspectors QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/13/2023 3:31 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 12:32 AM 32. All measurements in the NEC are shown in both inch-pound (imperial measurements) and metric values where applicable. Many dimensions are not affected. Some _________. will not change ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Trade Sizes QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/13/2023 3:32 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/13/2023 3:33 PM 33. In the international system of units, the prefix kilo- means ____. a. hundred b. thousand c. million d. billion ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Guide to Metric Usage QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/13/2023 3:34 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/13/2023 3:36 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

34. In the international system of units, the prefix milli- means ____. a. one hundredth b. one thousandth c. one millionth d. one billionth ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Guide to Metric Usage QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/13/2023 3:36 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/13/2023 3:37 PM 35. The NEC in 90.9(C)(1) states that where the actual measured size of a product is not the same as the nominal size, the _____ shall be used rather than dimensions. a. metric size b. next larger size c. nearest size d. trade size designator ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Metrics (SI) and the NEC QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:18 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:30 AM 36. The term Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories (NRTL) is used by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration and is used to classify and recognize qualified electrical product testing laboratories. A NRTL ________, the product is then “listed” to have a listing mark. performs tests on a product ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Listed Equipment and Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:19 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 3:20 AM 37. Be on the lookout for counterfeit electrical products. These products have not been tested and certified by a recognized testing laboratory. They can be a hazard to life and property. Counterfeit electrical products might also be referred to as ________. black market products ANSWER: POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 11

Name:

Class:

Date:

REFERENCES: The Enhanced UL Certification Mark QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:20 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 3:20 AM 38. Do not confuse a UL marking in a circle with the markings found on recognized components. Recognized components are intended components of a _______. finished product ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: The Enhanced UL Certification Mark QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:20 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 4:43 AM 39. UL previously produced several directories including Electrical Construction Equipment Directory (Green Book). The information previously provided is now located in UL’s online database, located at _______. www.ul.com/apps/product-iq ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: The Enhanced UL Certification Mark QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:21 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 3:21 AM 40. The primary function of Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories (NRTL) is to test and evaluate products for _______. safety ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Listed Equipment and Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories (NRTL) Electrical Equipment QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:21 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 4:44 AM

Page 12

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_02_Specifications, Electrical Symbols, and Outlets 1. An architect or electrical engineer prepares a set of drawings that shows the necessary instructions and details needed by the skilled workers who are to build the structure. The construction features of the structural members are shown along with the material required which includes sizes, quantities, and _______. locations ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Plans and Specifications QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:24 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 4:47 AM 2. An electrician must be able to _______ the 2-dimensional plans into an actual electrical installation and _______ the many different views of the plans and coordinate them into a 3-dimensional picture. a. convert, visualize b. install, maintain c. supervise, sell d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Plans and Specifications QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:25 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:05 AM 3. The electrician must be able to interpret the lines and symbols that refer to the electrical installation, the construction materials, and the _______. structural makeup of the building. ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Plans and Specifications QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:26 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 4:48 AM 4. Working drawings are usually complex. To prevent confusion, the architect prepares written specifications to provide general information to be used by all trades, including sizes, type and ________. desired quality ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Specifications QUESTION TYPE: Essay Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_02_Specifications, Electrical Symbols, and Outlets HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:27 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 3:28 AM 5. Plans and specifications are prepared by the architect or ________. electrical engineer ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Specifications QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:28 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 3:29 AM 6. Electrical symbols used on an architectural plan show the location and type of electrical device required. To reduce confusion with structural components, the shape of the lines that represent electrical wiring are ________. a. triangular b. curved c. straight d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Electrical Symbols QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:29 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 3:30 AM 7. Architect, engineers and designers will sometimes use different _______, so it is important to verify what is being indicated on the plans and in the specifications. a. equipment b. materials c. symbols d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Electrical Symbols QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:30 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 4:49 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_02_Specifications, Electrical Symbols, and Outlets 8. Curved lines are used to differentiate the electrical circuitry from the drawing lines used in _______. a. plumbing b. communication c. building construction d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Electrical Symbols QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:31 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 4:49 AM 9. Some curved lines show the connection of luminaires or the _____ for receptacles. a. minimum capacity b. exact location c. circuiting d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Electrical Symbols QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:33 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 3:33 AM 10. Be very careful when interpreting symbols because of the ______ between them. a. proximity b. clarity c. similarity d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Electrical Symbols QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:35 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 3:35 AM 11. The choice of luminaires is left to the homeowner. The electrician needs to know the details so that a box designed for the size and _____ of the luminaire can be positioned correctly. weight ANSWER: POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_02_Specifications, Electrical Symbols, and Outlets REFERENCES: Luminaires and Outlets QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:35 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:33 AM 12. Device boxes and faceplates are typically designed for 6-32 screws. These correspond to __________. a. 0.145 diameter, fine pitch b. 0.150 diameter, fine pitch c. 0.138 diameter, coarse pitch d. 0.138 diameter, fine pitch ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Outlet, Device, and Junction Boxes QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:36 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 3:37 AM 13. Considerations affecting choice of boxes include size of conductors, splices if any, and _____. clamps or fittings ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Outlet, Device, and Junction Boxes QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:37 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 3:37 AM 14. Nonmetallic boxes are typically stamped with the _________ of the box. a. diameter b. depth c. internal volume d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: When Using a Nonmetallic Box and All Conductors Are the Same Size. QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:37 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 3:38 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_02_Specifications, Electrical Symbols, and Outlets 15. NEC 314.16 dictates that outlet boxes, switch boxes, and device boxes should be large enough to provide _______ for the wires in that box, without having to jam or crowd the wires into the box. a. depth b. width c. diameter d. ample room ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Number of Conductors in Box QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:38 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 3:39 AM 16. If noncombustible surface material (tile, gypsum, plaster, and like material) is used on walls or ceilings, then boxes, plaster rings, domed covers, extension rings, or listed extenders must be mounted so that they will be set back no more than ______ inch from the face of the surface material. a. 1/8 b. 3/16 c. 1/4 d. 5/16 ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Flush-Mounted Installations QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 3:40 AM 17. Where combustible surface material (wood paneling) is used on walls or ceilings; the boxes, plaster rings, domed covers, extension rings, or listed extenders must be set ______. a. 1/4 inch recessed b. flush with the surface material c. 1/8 inch recessed d. no more than 1/16 inch recessed ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Flush-Mounted Installations QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 3:41 AM 18. Boxes used at lighting outlets must be designed or installed so that a luminaire may be attached to it. This is typically Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_02_Specifications, Electrical Symbols, and Outlets accomplished by the manufacturer providing in the boxes _____. a. screw threads b. tapped holes c. plaster rings d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Boxes at Outlets for Luminaires QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 3:42 AM 19. Ceiling outlet boxes used exclusively for lighting are required to be suitable to support a luminaire weighing a minimum of _______ . a. 25 lb b. 35 lb c. 50 lb d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Ceiling Outlets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 3:43 AM 20. Outlet boxes installed in the ceilings of habitable rooms of dwelling units where a ceiling fan could be installed must be either supplemented with a supporting framing member, marked as suitable, or _______. listed for the weight required ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Boxes at Ceiling-suspended (Paddle) Fan Outlets QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:44 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 3:44 AM 21. Standard mounting height for receptacles on walls is _________. a. 10-12 inches b. 12-18 inches c. 15-17 inches d. 17-24 inches Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_02_Specifications, Electrical Symbols, and Outlets ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Positioning of Receptacles QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:44 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 3:45 AM 22. Standard mounting height for receptacles on kitchen walls between the backsplash and cabinets is ____________. a. 42 inches b. 44-46 inches c. 38 inches d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Positioning of Receptacles QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:45 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 3:46 AM 23. Rooms or areas where specific height for receptacle outlets and switches are often specified include ________. a. kitchen countertops b. bathroom countertops c. laundry countertops d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Positioning of Receptacle Outlets, Switches, and Other Openings QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:46 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 3:46 AM 24. Electric baseboard heaters are generally prohibited from being installed under receptacle outlets as they might pose shock hazard or a ___________. fire hazard ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Positioning of Receptacle Outlets, Switches, and Other Openings QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:47 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_02_Specifications, Electrical Symbols, and Outlets DATE MODIFIED:

8/14/2023 3:47 AM

25. When tackling remodel work, make sure there is enough room to run ("fish") cables to where lighting, receptacles, or _____ are to be installed. switches ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Remodel (Old Work) QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:47 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 3:48 AM 26. Once you have cut an opening the size of the specific type of electrical box to be installed, you can _______. a. use caulk to hold the box in place b. use boxes with plaster ears c. use metal support straps that slide in alongside the box d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Remodel (Old Work) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:48 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 4:51 AM 27. Boxes can be installed in existing construction through a fairly small opening and are readily available for _______. a. luminaires b. paddle-fan support c. receptacles d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Remodel (Old Work) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:49 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 4:51 AM 28. Electrical wall boxes installed back to back or installed in the same stud or joist space _______ of the wall or ceiling. a. impact the structure b. defeat the fire-resistance rating c. impact the support Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_02_Specifications, Electrical Symbols, and Outlets d. defeat soundproofing ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Spread of Fire QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:50 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 4:52 AM 29. In fire-resistance rated walls, nonmetallic boxes are required to be marked with a listing mark (label) from an ETL, the hour rating (1 hour or 2 hours), and ______. the letters F, W, and/or C where F = floor, W = wall, and C = ceiling ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: What Is Fire-Resistance Rating? QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:51 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 3:51 AM 30. The maximum gap between a metallic or nonmetallic box and the wall material is ________. a. ¼ inch b. ½ inch c. ⅛ inch d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: What Is Fire-Resistance Rating? QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:51 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 3:52 AM 31. To calculate the number of conductors permitted in a metallic box in Table 314.16(A) where all conductors are the same: count the conductors, add two conductors for each device, add 1 for cable clamps, add 1 for equipment grounding conductors, and lastly _________. sum all the above volumes needed based on Table 314.16(B)(1) ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: When Using a Metal Device Box and All Conductors Are the Same Size QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:52 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_02_Specifications, Electrical Symbols, and Outlets DATE MODIFIED:

8/24/2023 12:10 AM

32. To calculate the number of conductors permitted in a metallic box in Table 314.16(A) where all conductors are different size: add the volumes of each size of conductors from Table 314.16(B)(1), add volume of only 1 cable clamp and 1 EGC based on largest conductor, add 2 volumes per yoke based on largest conductor, last _________. add all above and consult Table 314.16(A) ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: When Using a Metal Device Box and All Conductors Are the Same Size QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:53 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 3:53 AM 33. Select a metal box or combination of box and plaster ring from Table 314.16(A). To achieve minimum volume, this total might require: combine boxes, or 1 or 2 gang plaster ring, or a _______. deeper box ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: When Using a Metal Device Box and All Conductors Are the Same Size QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:53 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:43 AM 34. Non-metallic boxes are permitted, but the manufacturer must ______ . a. list the box b. mark the volume c. limit the conductors allowed d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: When Using a Metal or Nonmetallic Box and the Conductors Are Different Sizes QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:54 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 3:54 AM 35. NEC requires that boxes with internal volumes of ______ or less, other than those listed in Table 314.16(A), be durable and legibly marked by the manufacturer with their cubic-inch. a. 75 in3 b. 100 in3 c. 125 in3 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_02_Specifications, Electrical Symbols, and Outlets d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: When Using a Metal or Nonmetallic Box and the Conductors Are Different Sizes QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:54 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:44 AM 36. Where combustible surface material (tile, gypsum, plaster and like material) is used on walls or ceilings, then boxes, plaster rings, doomed covers, _________, or listed extenders must be mounted so that they will be set back not more than ¼ in. from the face of the surface material. extension rings ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Flush-Mounted Installations QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:56 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 12:26 AM 37. Fire-resistance materials and assemblies are covered in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. It details, among other things: detailed listing of outlets and boxes, manufacturers’ product part numbers, and ________. special purpose boxes ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: What Is Fire-Resistance Rating? QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:56 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 3:56 AM 38. To maintain the hourly rating of a fire-rated wall that contains electrical outlet and switch boxes, the UL Fire Resistance Directory lists an intumescent fire-resistant material that comes in “pads.” The material expands and chars, seals off the opening, and _______. prevents the spread analysis ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: What Is Fire-Resistance Rating? QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:57 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 3:57 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 11

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_02_Specifications, Electrical Symbols, and Outlets 39. Most communities that have adopted the ICC code require ______ around electrical conduits. a. flameproofing b. firestopping c. intumescent "pads" d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: What is Fire-Resistance Rating? QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 3:58 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:45 AM

Page 12

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_03_Determining the Required Number of Branch Circuits, Lighting Outlets, and Receptacle Outlets 1. To determine the floor area _____ dimensions of the area. Assume rectangular shapes and add several rectangles together if needed. a. measure each b. guesstimate c. use outside d. consult building plans ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Calculating Floor Area QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 4:18 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 4:19 AM 2. After determining dimensions, the NEC allows you to subtract ________. a. open porches b. unattached garages c. crawl spaces d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: First Floor Area QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 4:19 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 4:19 AM 3. The NEC tells us that the minimum unit load requirement for dwelling units is ________. a. 5 volt-amperes (VA) per square ft (50 VA/ m2) of floor area b. 3 volt-amperes (VA) per square ft (33 volt-amperes/m2) of floor area c. 6 volt-amperes (VA) per square ft (60 volt-amperes/m2) of floor area d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Determining the Minimum Number of Lighting Branch Circuits QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 4:20 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 4:20 AM 4. The rating of a branch circuit is determined by the _______. a. branch-circuit wire size b. rating of the overcurrent device Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_03_Determining the Required Number of Branch Circuits, Lighting Outlets, and Receptacle Outlets c. length of the circuit d. total number of receptacles ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Determining the Minimum Number of Lighting Branch Circuits QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 4:21 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 4:54 AM 5. The National Electrical Code requires outdoor receptacles to be _______. a. AFCI protected b. GFCI protected c. on a dedicated circuit d. GFCI protected and on a dedicated circuit ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: General Requirements for Receptacle Outlets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 4:22 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 4:55 AM 6. Crawl spaces and most attics would not normally be considered as being adaptable as habitable rooms or occupiable spaces, but most ______ in homes today could be considered as being adaptable for use as a habitable or occupiable room in the future. a. basements b. unfinished spaces c. detached garages d. porches ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Basement Area QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 4:38 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 12:53 AM 7. Volt-amperes equals watts in a purely resistive circuit and is very close in many circuits with small motors. For example, the small-appliance circuits in kitchens and dining rooms are given as ______________. a. 1000 volt-amperes per circuit b. 1200 volt-amperes per circuit c. 1500 volt-amperes per circuit Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_03_Determining the Required Number of Branch Circuits, Lighting Outlets, and Receptacle Outlets ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Calculating Loads QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 4:35 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 4:36 AM 8. NEC panels round-off the metric results of conversions. However, electrical units are used universally. The same everywhere would be a(n) __________. a. volt of power b. ohm of power c. ampere of power d. watt of power ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Inch-Pounds versus Metrics When Calculating Loads QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 4:36 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 12:42 AM 9. In computing load, the floor area of the dwelling is based on the square footage area. Which area would not be included in the floor area? a. attics b. open porches c. hallways d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: First Floor Area QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 4:37 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 4:38 AM 10. NEC tells us that the minimum unit load requirement for dwelling units is 3 volt-amperes (VA) per square ft. This calculation includes general use receptacle outlets and some small motors. For the outlets on these branch circuits _______. a. calculation for outdoors is required b. loads for unfinished spaces is required c. loads for detached garages is required d. no additional load is required Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_03_Determining the Required Number of Branch Circuits, Lighting Outlets, and Receptacle Outlets ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Determining the Minimum Number of Lighting Branch Circuits QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 4:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 4:56 AM 11. To determine the number of lighting outlet branch circuits required, _______ the minimum lighting load calculated using 22.5(C) by the ampere rating of the branch circuits to determine the number of lighting outlet branch circuits required. a. multiply b. divide c. add d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Determining the Minimum Number of Lighting Branch Circuits QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 4:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:09 AM 12. An example of a branch circuit calculation: To determine the minimum number of 15-ampere branch circuits required for general purpose lighting and receptacles in a residence, here are the simple steps:

This equates to a minimum of ______________. ANSWER: one 15-ampere lighting branch circuit for every 600 ft2 (55.8 m2) OR one 20-ampere lighting branch circuit for every 800 ft2 (74.4 m2). POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Determining the Minimum Number of Lighting Branch Circuits QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 4:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/25/2023 12:42 AM 13. Where the calculations result in a small fraction of an ampere, except such fractions are permitted to be dropped. A small fraction is considered _________. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_03_Determining the Required Number of Branch Circuits, Lighting Outlets, and Receptacle Outlets a. smaller than 0.3 b. smaller than 0.25 c. smaller than 0.35 d. smaller than 0.5 ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Determining the Minimum Number of Lighting Branch Circuits QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 4:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 12:56 AM 14. Load calculations for small-appliance branch circuits and other major appliance branch circuits are ________ the general lighting loads. a. in addition to b. included in c. ignored in d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Determining the Minimum Number of Lighting Branch Circuits QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 4:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/25/2023 12:57 AM 15. At a minimum, 15-ampere branch circuits are required in _______. a. bathrooms and for hall lighting b. front entries and on porches c. front bedroom lighting and outdoor receptacles d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Summary of Where Receptacle and Lighting Outlets Must Be Installed In Residences QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 4:45 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 4:57 AM 16. At a minimum, 15-ampere branch circuits are required in_______. a. master bedroom lighting and outdoor receptacles b. study/bedroom lighting c. kitchen lighting Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_03_Determining the Required Number of Branch Circuits, Lighting Outlets, and Receptacle Outlets d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Determining the Minimum Number of Lighting Branch Circuits QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 4:46 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 4:58 AM 17. At a minimum, 20-ampere branch circuits are required in _______. a. master bath b. front entry/porch c. kitchen lighting d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Determining the Minimum Number of Lighting Branch Circuits QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 4:51 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 4:59 AM 18. At a minimum, 20-ampere branch circuits are also required in _______. a. kitchen receptacles b. dishwasher receptacles c. laundry room receptacles d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Summary of Where Receptacle and Lighting Outlets Must Be Installed In Residences QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 4:52 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:00 AM 19. In most rooms of a dwelling unit, wall receptacles must be placed so that no point measured horizontally along the floor line in any wall space is more than ____ feet from a receptacle outlet. a. 3 b. 5 c. 6 d. 12 ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_03_Determining the Required Number of Branch Circuits, Lighting Outlets, and Receptacle Outlets REFERENCES: General Requirements for Receptacle Outlets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 4:53 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 4:54 AM 20. Receptacle outlets located in the floor more than _______ inches from the wall are not to be counted as meeting the required number of wall receptacle outlets. a. 16 b. 18 c. 20 d. 24 ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: General Requirements for Receptacle Outlets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 4:54 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 4:55 AM 21. Hallways ____ feet or longer in homes must have at least one receptacle outlet. a. 3 b. 5 c. 10 d. 15 ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: General Requirements for Receptacle Outlets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 4:55 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 4:55 AM 22. Foyers that are not part of a hallway and have an area that is greater than _______ ft2 are required to have a receptacle(s) located in each wall space 3 ft of more in width. a. 50 b. 60 c. 70 d. 80 ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: General Requirements for Receptacle Outlets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_03_Determining the Required Number of Branch Circuits, Lighting Outlets, and Receptacle Outlets HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 4:56 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 1:16 AM 23. Receptacles are required to be installed on the outside of the home. They are required to be ________. a. AFCI type protected b. overcurrent protected c. GFCI type protected d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: General Requirements for Receptacle Outlets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/14/2023 4:58 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/14/2023 5:01 AM 24. All nonlocking receptacles rated 125-volts through 250-volts that are located in damp locations are required to be listed as _________. a. duplex receptacles type b. single receptacles type c. weather-resistant type d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: General Requirements for Receptacle Outlets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 12:36 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 12:37 PM 25. All nonlocking receptacles rated 125-volts through 250-volts that are located in wet locations are required to be listed as _________. a. duplex receptacles type b. single receptacles type c. weather-resistant type d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: General Requirements for Receptacle Outlets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 12:37 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_03_Determining the Required Number of Branch Circuits, Lighting Outlets, and Receptacle Outlets DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 12:38 PM 26. All nonlocking receptacles rated 125-volts through 250-volts are required to be listed as _________. a. duplex receptacles type b. tamper-resistant type c. weather-resistant type d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: General Requirements for Receptacle Outlets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 12:38 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 12:39 PM 27. All receptacles located in the garage or accessory building located at grade level are required to be _________. a. duplex type b. AFCI type c. GFCI type d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: General Requirements for Receptacle Outlets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 12:39 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 1:00 AM 28. Receptacles in areas with sinks and permanent provisions for food preparation, beverage preparation, or cooking must also be __________. a. GFCI protected b. listed for damp locations c. weather-resistant d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: General Requirements for Receptacle Outlets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 12:41 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:49 AM

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_04_Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Conductor Sizing 1. The ampere rating of the branch circuit ______ protective device (fuse or circuit breaker) determines the rating of the branch circuit. a. GFCI b. AFCI c. overcurrent d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Basics of Wire Sizing and Loading QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 12:51 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 12:52 PM 2. Ampacity value depends on the conductor’s _______, whether the conductor is copper, copper-clad aluminum, or aluminum, and the ________. a. cross-sectional area; insulation b. resistance; length of run c. type of connections; voltage d. diameter; type of connectors ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Ampacity QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 12:52 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 12:53 PM 3. The ampacity values in the tables are valid where there are no more than _____ current-carrying conductors in a raceway or cable and where the temperature does not exceed 86°F (30°C). a. six b. three c. two d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Ampacity QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 12:53 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:52 AM 4. If the ambient temperature exceeds _______, the ampacity values must also be corrected according to the factors found Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_04_Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Conductor Sizing in Table 310.15(B)(1). a. 90°F (32.2°C) b. 86°F (30°C) c. 100°F (38°C) d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Ampacity QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 12:54 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 12:55 PM 5. Usual dwelling branch circuits that serve more than one outlet are rated sometimes 10, 20, and ________. a. 15 amperes b. 25 amperes c. 35 amperes d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Basics of Wire Sizing and Loading QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 12:55 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 12:56 PM 6. Conductors must be protected against overcurrent by _____ or ______ rated not more than the ampacity of the conductors. a. AFCI, GFCI b. GFCI, AFCI c. fuses, circuit breakers d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Overcurrent Protection for Conductors QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 12:56 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:54 AM 7. Even though conductors are sometimes rated higher, NEC 240.4(D) spells out the maximum overcurrent protection for small branch-circuit conductors. That section limits 12 AWG copper to _______. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_04_Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Conductor Sizing a. 25 amperes b. 30 amperes c. 20 amperes d. 40 amperes ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: The Weakest Link of the Chain QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 12:57 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:02 AM 8. The maximum overcurrent protection for 14 AWG copper conductors is _______. a. 20 amperes b. 25 amperes c. 15 amperes d. 10 amperes ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Conductor Sizing QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 12:58 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:03 AM 9. The NEC in Table 210.24 shows that the minimum conductor size for branch-circuit wiring is _______. a. 20 AWG b. 18 AWG c. 16 AWG d. 14 AWG ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Wire Size Overcurrent Protection for Conductors QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 12:58 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:03 AM 10. Terminations for all electrical connections to devices and equipment are required to be tightened to the ____ as required by the manufacturer. a. pressure b. tightness Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_04_Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Conductor Sizing c. torque d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Wire Connections QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 12:59 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:10 AM 11. Connectors not marked __________ are for use with copper conductors only. a. with their rating b. copper only c. "any metal" d. "AL" or "AL/CU" ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Wire Connections QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 1:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:55 AM 12. The current-carrying capacity (ampacity) of aluminum wire for a given size, insulation, and temperature of 30°C is _____________. a. more than that of copper b. equal to that of copper c. less than that of copper d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Aluminum Conductors QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 1:01 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 1:04 AM 13. Aluminum conductors have a higher resistance compared to a copper conductor of the same size. When considering ______ a conductor’s resistance is a key ingredient. a. ampacity b. GFCI protection c. voltage drop Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_04_Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Conductor Sizing d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Aluminum Conductors QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 1:18 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 1:18 PM 14. The surface of aluminum ______ as soon as it is exposed to air. If this surface is not penetrated by the connector, a poor connection is a result. a. anneals b. oxidizes c. corrodes d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Common Connection Problems QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 1:49 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:11 AM 15. Aluminum wire expands and contracts to a greater degree than does copper wire for an equal load. This is referred to as ________. This factor is another cause of a poor connection. a. creep or cold flow b. elongation c. stress d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Common Connection Problems QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 1:52 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 1:53 PM 16. Voltage drop in a residence can be observed when _______. a. lights are OK b. motors run slower and hotter c. most appliances work properly d. all of the above Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_04_Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Conductor Sizing ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Voltage Drop QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 1:53 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 1:54 PM 17. A simple formula for calculating voltage drop on single-phase systems considers the _____ of the conductors and the ambient temperature. a. ac impedance b. dc resistance c. reactance d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Voltage Drop QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 1:57 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 1:57 PM 18. How does a person determine voltage drop in a single-phase circuit? To Find Voltage Drop in a Single-Phase Circuit ANSWER:

To Find Conductor Size for a Single-Phase Circuit

In the above formulae: Ed = result of voltage drop calculation in volts. K = approximate resistance in ohms per circular-mil foot at 75°C. • For uncoated copper wire, use a K factor of 12.9. • For aluminum wire, use 21.2. I = current in amperes flowing through the conductors. L = length in feet from beginning of circuit to the load. CMA = cross-sectional area of the conductors in circular mils. We use the factor of 2 for single-phase circuits because there is voltage drop in both conductors to and from the connected load.

POINTS:

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_04_Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Conductor Sizing REFERENCES: Voltage Drop QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 1:59 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 1:30 AM 19. To make voltage drop and conductor sizing calculations for a 3-phase system, substitute the factor of _______ in place of the factor 2 in the voltage drop formulae. a. 3 b. pi c. 1.732 (the square root of 3) d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Voltage Drop QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 2:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 2:11 PM 20. For branch circuits the recommended maximum voltage drop is 3%. For feeders, the recommended maximum voltage drop is 3%. When both branch circuits and feeders are involved, the total voltage drop should not exceed ________. a. 3% b. 4% c. 5% d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Code References to Voltage Drop QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 2:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:03 AM 21. Uses permitted for nonmetallic-sheathed cable include _______. a. May be run exposed or concealed in dry locations b. May be embedded in masonry, concrete, plaster, adobe, and fill c. May be installed or fished in the hollow voids of masonry blocks or tile walls where exposed d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_04_Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Conductor Sizing REFERENCES: Types of Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 3:17 PM 22. Cables may feed surface-mounted enclosures. Where cable is used, each cable shall be ____ to the cabinet, cutout box, or meter socket enclosure. a. secured b. over 10 feet length c. sealed with putty d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Securing Cables to Cabinets and Boxes QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:18 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:05 AM 23. 312.5(C) exception allows cables with nonmetallic sheaths to enter the top of a surface-mounted enclosure through one or more nonflexible raceways not less than _____ in. and no more than ____ ft under certain conditions. a. 3, 10 b. 4, 12 c. 8, 10 d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Securing Cables to Cabinets and Boxes QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/25/2023 1:08 AM 24. Nonmetallic-sheathed cables are usually secured to a panelboard, box, or cabinet, with a _______. a. strap b. screws c. clamp or connector d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Alternate Method of Installing NM above Panelboard Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_04_Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Conductor Sizing QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:20 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 3:20 PM 25. Exception 1 to 312.5(C) requires that each cable is fastened within ______ measured along the sheath, of the outer end of the raceway. a. 10 inches (254 mm) b. 15 inches (380 mm) c. 12 inches (300 mm) d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Alternate Method of Installing NM above Panelboard QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:21 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 3:22 PM

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_05_Conductor Identification, Switch Control of Lighting Circuits, Bonding_Grounding of Wiring Devices, and Induction Heating 1. The insulation on the ______ must have an outer finish that is a color other than green, white, gray, or three continuous white stripes on other than green insulation. a. phase conductor b. grounded conductor c. “hot” conductor d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Conductor Identification [NEC ® Articles 200 and 210] QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:23 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 3:24 PM 2. Popular colors for the "hot" conductor are _________. a. black b. purple c. sky blue d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Conductor Identification [NEC ® Articles 200 and 210] QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:24 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 3:25 PM 3. The grounded (identified) conductor is required to have an outer finish that is either ________. a. continuous white or gray b. green or green with yellow stripes c. yellow or yellow with green stripes d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Conductor Identification [NEC ® Articles 200 and 210] QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:25 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 3:26 PM 4. For residential wiring, the grounded conductor with white insulation is commonly referred to as the neutral. Note that a white conductor is ______. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_05_Conductor Identification, Switch Control of Lighting Circuits, Bonding_Grounding of Wiring Devices, and Induction Heating a. not always a neutral b. always a neutral ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Grounded Neutral Conductor QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:26 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 3:26 PM 5. In house wiring, it is rare to see a conductor that has three continuous white stripes on other than green insulation. This method is sometimes found on ________. a. larger conductors b. all small conductors c. branch circuits only d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Conductor Identification [NEC ® Articles 200 and 210] QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:27 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 3:27 PM 6. The type most commonly used for residential wiring projects is the "ac only" general use snap switch. They are marked for identifying their voltage and _________. a. current ratings b. type ratings c. suitability ratings d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Toggle Switch Ratings QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:27 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:15 AM 7. Among the allowed uses for AC toggle (snap) switches are _______. a. resistive and inductive loads not exceeding the ratings of the switch b. tungsten-filament lamp loads at any voltage c. electric discharge lamp loads not exceeding the marked voltage rating of the switch Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_05_Conductor Identification, Switch Control of Lighting Circuits, Bonding_Grounding of Wiring Devices, and Induction Heating d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: AC General-Use Snap Switches [404.14(A)] QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:28 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:06 AM 8. AC/DC general use toggle switches can be used for _______. a. tungsten-filament loads within switch ratings if T-rated b. inductive loads not exceeding 80 percent of the ampere rating of the switch c. motor circuits up to 75% of ratings d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: AC/DC General-Use Snap Switches [404.14(B)] QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:29 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:07 AM 9. Illuminated toggle switches, rocker switches, and illuminated faceplates require the _______. a. metallic box b. grounded circuit conductor c. equipment grounding conductor d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Switches Controlling Lighting Loads QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:31 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 3:31 PM 10. Using the equipment grounding conductor as a substitute for the circuit’s grounded or neutral conductor is _______. a. allowed b. not allowed c. allowed in 3-way loops d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_05_Conductor Identification, Switch Control of Lighting Circuits, Bonding_Grounding of Wiring Devices, and Induction Heating REFERENCES: Safety Alert QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:31 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:08 AM 11. When a load is to be controlled from two locations _______. a. standard 2-terminal snap switches are used b. three-way switches are used c. four-way switches are used d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Three-Way Switches QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:32 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:09 AM 12. Four-way switches are used where switch control is needed from ______. a. more than one location b. more than two locations c. more than three locations d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Four-Way Switches QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:33 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 3:34 PM 13. In switches with pilot lights, the pilot _______. a. is connected in parallel with the load b. has a thermistor connected in series with the pilot c. is never fully "off" d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Double-Pole Switches QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_05_Conductor Identification, Switch Control of Lighting Circuits, Bonding_Grounding of Wiring Devices, and Induction Heating DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:34 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:10 AM 14. Double pole switches are sometimes used to control _______. a. lights b. small appliances c. electric clothes dryers d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Double-Pole Switches QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:35 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:11 AM 15. Electronic controls, such as some motion (occupancy) sensors, some dimmers, some fan speed controls, and X-10 transmitting and receiving devices require a small voltage drop across the device to operate. When these devices are turned to OFF, the device is really not in a full OFF mode. This can be _________. hazardous ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Does OFF Really Mean OFF? QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:37 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 3:38 PM 16. There are instances when a pilot light is desired at the switch location. One type of true pilot light is ___ when the light is ______________. a. dim; on b. on; on c. on; off d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Switches with Pilot Lights QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:38 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:07 AM 17. When control is desired from 3 locations, four-way switches are connected to the travelers between two 3-way Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_05_Conductor Identification, Switch Control of Lighting Circuits, Bonding_Grounding of Wiring Devices, and Induction Heating switches. One _____ is fed by the source, the other ____ switch is connected to the load. a. 3-way, 3-way b. 3-way, 4-way c. 4-way, 3-way d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Four-Way Switches QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:40 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:10 AM 18. A light controlled by two 3-way switches that is fed at the light must have a _______ run to both switches if a neutral is required at both switches. a. 3-wire cable b. 4-wire cable c. 2-wire cable d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Three-Way Switch Control, Feed at Light (Alternate Connection). QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:40 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 3:41 PM 19. As a general rule (404.2(C)), the grounded (neutral) conductor is required where switches control lights on a grounded branch circuit serving hallways, bathrooms, and _______. habitable rooms ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Changing Colors When Conductors Are in a Cable QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:42 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 3:42 PM 20. Exceptions to the above rule include where the white wire is part of a three-way loop, the white wire _______. a. must be re-identified b. must not be used c. a fourth wire should be installed Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_05_Conductor Identification, Switch Control of Lighting Circuits, Bonding_Grounding of Wiring Devices, and Induction Heating d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Switches Controlling Lighting Loads QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:42 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:12 AM 21. A grounded conductor is not needed where _______. a. conductors exit the box enclosing the switch through a raceway, provided that the raceway is large enough for all contained conductors, including a grounded conductor b. snap switches with integral enclosures comply with 300.15(E) c. lighting in the area is controlled by manual means d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Switches Controlling Lighting Loads QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:43 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:12 AM 22. When used as an ungrounded or “hot” conductor, the white insulation on the conductor must be permanently ________. reidentified ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Changing Colors When Conductors Are in a Cable QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:45 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 3:46 PM 23. Describe a three-way switch control, feed at switch. A 2-wire cable is run to the first 3-way switch, a 3-wire cable is run between the two ANSWER: switches, and another 2-wire cable is run from the second switch to the lamp. POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Three-Way Switch Control, Feed at Switch QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_05_Conductor Identification, Switch Control of Lighting Circuits, Bonding_Grounding of Wiring Devices, and Induction Heating DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

8/15/2023 3:46 PM 8/15/2023 3:46 PM

24. Describe a three-way switch control, feed at light. A 2-wire "source" cable is run to the lighting outlet box. The neutral is connected to the ANSWER: light and carries through to both switches, being capped at each switch unless needed. The "hot" conductor from the source does not connect to the light, but connects to one of the "hot" conductor in a 3-wire cable that goes to the first switch. That same "hot" conductor does not attach to the first switch, but attaches to a "hot" conductor in a 4-wire cable that goes to the second switch. This conductor connects to the common terminal of the second switch. The other "hot" conductor in the 3-wire cable between the light and first switch connects the light to the common terminal of the first switch. The other two conductors in the 4-wire cable connect the "traveler" terminals of the two switches. POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Three-Way Switch Control, Feed at Light QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:47 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 3:48 PM 25. Describe the operation of three control points using a 4-way switch. Source neutral must connect to the light and also be capped at each switch unless needed. ANSWER: The other terminal to the light must go to a common on one of the 3-way switches. The common on the other 3-way switch must connect to the source "hot" conductor. The 4-way switch must be installed between the two 3-way switches and the travelers from each 3way must attach to the 4-way switch. Provide the proper cabeling to accomplish these basic rules. POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Four-Way Switches QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:48 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 3:48 PM 26. A metal box is considered to be adequately grounded when properly connected to an equipment grounding conductor path such as armored cable, metallic raceway, or _____. equipment grounding conductor ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Bonding and Grounding at Receptacles and Switches QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:49 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_05_Conductor Identification, Switch Control of Lighting Circuits, Bonding_Grounding of Wiring Devices, and Induction Heating DATE MODIFIED:

8/15/2023 3:49 PM

27. Metal boxes usually have a ______ tapped hole for securing an equipment grounding screw. a. #6-24 b. #10-32 c. #10-24 d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Bonding and Grounding at Receptacles and Switches QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:49 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 3:50 PM 28. Switches and other devices usually are effectively grounded using the ______ screw holes of a metal box for the metal yoke. a. #6-24 b. #6-32 c. #10-24 d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Bonding and Grounding at Receptacles and Switches QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:51 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 3:51 PM 29. If more than one equipment grounding conductor enters a box they _________. a. must not be spliced b. must be spliced with tape applied c. must be spliced only with devices suitable for use d. can be spliced with a solder ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Bonding and Grounding at Receptacles and Switches QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:52 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 3:52 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_05_Conductor Identification, Switch Control of Lighting Circuits, Bonding_Grounding of Wiring Devices, and Induction Heating 30. To help control induction heating, 3-way switches should switch _______. a. only the ungrounded conductor b. the neutral c. the grounding conductor d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Induction Heating QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:53 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:13 AM 31. NEC requires that in general, all conductors of the same circuit and, where used, the grounded conductor and all equipment grounding conductors and bonding conductors shall be contained within the same raceway, conduit body, or _____. auxiliary gutter ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Induction Heating QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:54 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 3:54 PM 32. Where a conductor of the same circuit are run together, __________. a. the magnetic fields add heat due to induction b. the magnetic fields are opposite and cancel c. all conductors contribute to induction d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Induction Heating QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:55 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 3:56 PM 33. A typical application of a timer is in a bathroom for the control of a(n) _____. a. exhaust fan b. shaver c. outdoor lighting Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Page 11

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_06_Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters, Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupters, Surge Protective Devices, Immersions Detection Circuit Interrupters 1. Electric shock can cause _______. a. internal hemorrhages b. destruction of tissues c. destruction of nerves, and muscles d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Electrical Shock Hazards QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 3:58 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:15 AM 2. Further injury can result from a fall, cuts, _____, or broken bones. burns ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Electrical Shock Hazards QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 4:00 PM 3. The effect of an electric current passing through a human body varies, depending on voltage, contact resistance, _______. and the path of current ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Electrical Shock Hazards QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:01 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:16 AM 4. Generally, voltages of less than 50 volts to ground are considered safe. Voltages 50 volts and greater are considered _______. a. potentially lethal b. unlikely c. can cause damage d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_06_Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters, Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupters, Surge Protective Devices, Immersions Detection Circuit Interrupters QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:02 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 4:03 PM 5. Currents over _____ are considered by some as the "let go" limit. a. 5-10 mA b. 10- 16 mA c. 10-23 mA d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Electrical Shock Hazards QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 4:04 PM 6. AFCI's recognize _______ and de-energize the circuit when an arc fault is detected. a. ground faults b. shorts between phase conductors c. characteristics unique to arcing d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupters (AFCIs) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:05 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 4:05 PM 7. GFCI receptacles break both the ungrounded (“hot”) and ________conductors. This is a requirement of UL 943, the safety standard for GFCI devices. a. ground (green) b. grounded (white) c. both a and b d. none of these ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: What a GFCI does QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_06_Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters, Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupters, Surge Protective Devices, Immersions Detection Circuit Interrupters DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 4:06 PM 8. A GFCI monitors the current balance between the _______ “hot” conductor and the ______conductor. a. phase, grounding b. ungrounded, grounded c. phase, other phase d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: What a GFCI does QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 4:08 PM 9. Arc fault protection is specifically not to be provided for _______ and _______ branch circuits. a. fire alarm, arc welding b. porch, crawl space c. hallway, basements d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupters (AFCIs) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:08 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 4:09 PM 10. Immersion detection circuit interrupters (IDCIs) and appliance leakage current interrupters (ALCIs) provide people with shock protection. Leakage current in the range of _______ milliamperes cut off power to the appliance. a. 1 to 2 b. 3 to 4 c. 4 to 6 d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: A-head: Immersion Detection Circuit Interrupters (IDCIs) and Appliance Leakage Current Interrupters (ALCIs) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:09 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_06_Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters, Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupters, Surge Protective Devices, Immersions Detection Circuit Interrupters DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 4:10 PM 11. An installer can choose between six methods for providing the AFCI protection. These include outlets or devices in bedrooms, kitchens, and _____. recreation rooms ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: How to Provide AFCI Protection QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 4:11 PM 12. Common devices which AFCI protection applies include _________. a. timers b. fire alarms c. receptacles d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: What Is a Device QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 4:12 PM 13. Among the six different methods of providing AFCI protection, the most simple and unencumbered is a listed ___________. a. combination type AFCI b. AFCI at the first outlet device ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:13 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 4:13 PM 14. A GFCI device is designed to sense and respond to a ground fault. Among the types of areas requiring GFCI protection of receptacles are bedrooms, kitchens, and _______ . outdoor receptacles ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: NEC Requirements for Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters (210.8) QUESTION TYPE: Essay Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_06_Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters, Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupters, Surge Protective Devices, Immersions Detection Circuit Interrupters HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:14 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 4:14 PM 15. GFCI and AFCI technologies are compatible. There _______be a problem if the devices are connected in series. a. will not b. can c. will d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Is It Okay to Use AFCI and GFCI Devices in Series? QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:14 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 4:17 PM 16. ______AFCI and GFCI devices are listed for use on multiwire branch circuits. a. Some b. All c. No d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: What about Multiwire (shared neutral) Branch Circuits? QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:17 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 8:13 AM 17. Two single-pole AFCIs or GFCIs on a multiwire branch circuit will not function because each needs to have ________from that branch circuit connected to that particular AFCI or GFCI. a. the white grounded conductor b. a phase conductor c. a means for grounding d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: What about Multiwire (shared neutral) Branch Circuits? QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_06_Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters, Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupters, Surge Protective Devices, Immersions Detection Circuit Interrupters DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:18 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 4:19 PM 18. AFCI and GFCI that are not listed for use on multiwire branch circuits have clear instructions warning _________. a. "OK to share circuit" b. OK to use AFCI c. "Never share a neutral" d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: What about Multiwire (shared neutral) Branch Circuits? QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:21 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 4:22 PM 19. Tamper-resistant receptacles are required in all dwelling units, including _______. common areas of buildings ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Tamper-Resistant Receptacles QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:23 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 4:23 PM 20. There are a number of exceptions to the tamper-resistant requirement, including receptacles that are not easily accessible, receptacles that are part of an appliance, and ________. receptacles that are more than 5½ ft above the floor ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Tamper-Resistant Receptacles QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:24 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/22/2023 8:36 AM 21. Tamper-resistant receptacles energize the blade contacts ______. a. whenever required b. only for a male plug c. only for a female plug d. all of the above Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_06_Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters, Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupters, Surge Protective Devices, Immersions Detection Circuit Interrupters ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Tamper-Resistant Receptacles QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:25 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 4:25 PM 22. _____ 15- and 20-ampere, 125- and 250-volt nonlocking type receptacle installed in a damp or wet location are required to be listed weather-resistant type. a. Most b. None c. All d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Weather Resistant QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:26 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 4:26 PM 23. When an outdoor receptacle in a damp location is required to be weather resistant, it ______ GFCI protected. a. doesn't need to be b. also needs to be c. must be AFCI and d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Putting the Rules Together QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:26 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 4:27 PM 24. Where any receptacle replacements are made, the NEC generally requires that the replacement receptacles be _____________. a. AFCI protected b. GFCI protected where required c. both AFCI and/or GFCI type if required currently d. neither AFCI nor GFCI type ANSWER: c Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_06_Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters, Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupters, Surge Protective Devices, Immersions Detection Circuit Interrupters POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Replacing Existing Receptacles QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:27 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 4:29 PM 25. If replacing an outdoor receptacle in a damp location, the receptacle replacement is required to be weather-resistant where required currently and _______. tamper-resistant where required currently ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Replacing Existing Receptacles QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:30 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 4:31 PM 26. If replacing a receptacle where the box is properly grounded, the replacement must be a grounding type or _________. GFCI protected ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Replacing Existing Two-Wire Receptacles Where Grounding Means Does Exist QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:31 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 4:31 PM 27. If a two-wire receptacle is encountered it is _________to remove or cut off the grounding pin on the cord plug. a. not permissible b. permissible ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Replacing Existing Two-Wire Receptacles Where Grounding Means Does Not Exist QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:32 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 4:33 PM 28. If replacing a receptacle where the box is not grounded, the replacement receptacle may be a nongrounding type or the replacement receptacle may be a GFCI type marked _________ . "No Equipment Ground" ANSWER: POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_06_Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters, Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupters, Surge Protective Devices, Immersions Detection Circuit Interrupters REFERENCES:

Replacing Existing Two-Wire Receptacles Where Grounding Means Does Not Exist QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:33 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/22/2023 8:41 AM 29. All temporary 125-volt, single-phase, 15-, 20-, and 30-ampere receptacle outlets used for construction ______ GFCI protected. must be ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter Personnel Protection for All Temporary Wiring QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:34 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 4:34 PM 30. On construction sites there is a continual presence of a shock hazard that can lead to serious personal injury or ________. death through electrocution ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter Personnel Protection for All Temporary Wiring QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:35 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 4:35 PM 31. All temporary 125-volt, single-phase, 15-, 20-, and 30-ampere receptacle outlets on small (15 kW max.) portable generators used for construction ______ GFCI protected. a. can be b. must be c. should not be ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter Personnel Protection for All Temporary QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:35 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 4:36 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_06_Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters, Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupters, Surge Protective Devices, Immersions Detection Circuit Interrupters 32. Manual reset is advantageous with portable GFCI devices should a _______occur or if the GFCI is unplugged. a. fault b. power outage ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter Personnel Protection for All Temporary QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:37 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 8:17 AM 33. The SPD immediately near the service is required to be _______. a. short power device b. standard power device c. Either type 1 or 2 d. Type 3 ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Surge Protective Devices (SPDs) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:37 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 4:38 PM 34. The requirement for surge protection at the service equipment _______the installation of SPD, often Type 3, devices downstream closer to the load. a. negates the need for b. does not prevent c. adds to d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Surge Protective Devices (SPDs) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:38 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 4:39 PM 35. Surges can be line to neutral, line to ground, or _______ . line to line ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Surge Protective Devices (SPDs) Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_06_Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters, Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupters, Surge Protective Devices, Immersions Detection Circuit Interrupters QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:39 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 4:42 PM 36. Surge protective devices rely on ______to function correctly. a. a neutral b. a three-wire system c. an equipment grounding conductor d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Surge Protective Devices (SPDs) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:42 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 4:43 PM 37. Whole-House surge protectors ___________. a. do not work reliably b. offer surge protection for the entire house c. are not widely available d. negate the need for any more SPDs ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Surge Protective Devices (SPDs) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 4:43 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 4:44 PM 38. SPDs use MOVs to clamp the transient in times of ______________. a. 1 second b. 2 seconds or less c. less than 1 nanosecond d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Surge Protective Devices (SPDs) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 11

Name:

Class:

Date:

Page 12

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_07_Luminaires, Ballasts, and Lamps 1. An IC luminaire is _________. a. marked for burial in thermal insulation b. ready for outdoor use c. approved for closets d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Recessed Luminaires QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 5:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 7:57 AM 2. “Non-Type IC” luminaires are for installations in non-insulated ceilings and must only be kept at least ____________inches away from insulation. a. 1 b. 2 c. 3 d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Recessed Luminaires QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 5:13 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 5:14 PM 3. "Inherently Protected" luminaires are designed so that the outside surfaces do not exceed _______. a. 180°F b. 194°F c. 200°F ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Recessed Luminaires QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 6:35 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 7:56 AM 4. Luminaires used as raceways are permitted _________. a. always b. if so listed and marked c. only on feeders Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_07_Luminaires, Ballasts, and Lamps d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: The Purpose of the Junction Box (Wiring Compartment) on a Recessed Luminaire Housing QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 5:17 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 5:19 PM 5. Luminaires used for through-wiring are permitted _________. a. if so identified b. always c. on branch circuits only d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: The Purpose of the Junction Box (Wiring Compartment) on a Recessed Luminaire Housing QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 5:20 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 5:21 PM 6. Incandescent lamps give a _______ color rendition. a. cooler b. warm and natural c. 75 lb (34 kg) d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Energy Saving by Control QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 5:22 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 5:23 PM 7. Fluorescent lamps generally have a longer life. Color rendition varies from warm to various shades of white, depending on _____. a. R rating b. C rating c. K rating d. all of the above Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_07_Luminaires, Ballasts, and Lamps ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Energy Saving by Control QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 5:26 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 5:27 PM 8. LED lights typically have a very long life from _______. a. 5,000 to 10,000 hours b. 10,000 to 15,000 hours c. 25,000 to 50,000 hours d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Energy Saving by Control QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 5:27 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 5:29 PM 9. Rather than a filament, to operate, a fluorescent lamp requires a ______. a. toroid b. load-limiting fuse c. ballast d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Fluorescent Ballasts QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 5:30 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 5:32 PM 10. Poor starting of a fluorescent lamp can be caused by poor contacts in the lamp holder, poor grounding, or ________. cold temperature (approx. below 50°F) ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Other Considerations QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 5:37 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 5:37 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_07_Luminaires, Ballasts, and Lamps 11. An incandescent lamp operating at a voltage greater than its rated voltage will not last as long but will burn ______. a. dim b. brighter c. the same d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Keep it Simple! QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 5:38 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 5:39 PM 12. Most fluorescent ballasts will operate satisfactorily within a range of their rated voltage ________. a. +10 to -10 b. +1 to -1% c. +5% to -7 d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Other Considerations QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 5:39 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 5:40 PM 13. An incandescent lamp operating at a lower voltage than its rating will last longer __________as it should. a. but will not burn as bright b. and not turn on c. and not turn off d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Keep it Simple! QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 5:40 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 5:41 PM 14. Operating a fluorescent ballast at an over-voltage condition causes it to run hot and may ______. shorten it's life ANSWER: Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_07_Luminaires, Ballasts, and Lamps POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Voltage QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 5:41 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 5:41 PM 15. Operating a ballast in an under-voltage situation can result in premature lamp failure and _______. unreliable starting ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Voltage QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 5:42 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 5:42 PM 16. LED luminaires that are marked as suitable for installation with a clothes closet storage space are __________. a. permitted b. not permitted c. permitted if recessed d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: LED Luminaires and the NEC QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 5:43 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 5:43 PM 17. Requirements for cord-connection luminaires are provided in NEC Article _________. a. 210 b. 410.62 c. 410.2 d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: LED Luminaires and the NEC QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 5:44 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 5:45 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_07_Luminaires, Ballasts, and Lamps 18. When replacing an old luminaire in an older house with a new luminaire, beware of ____. a. space around boxes b. rubber (Type R) or thermoplastic (Type T) insulation c. plaster or plastic that breaks d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Replacing a Luminaire in an Older Home: Will There Be Problems? QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 5:45 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 5:46 PM 19. Framing members of a suspended ceiling grid used to support luminaires must be securely fastened together. Luminaires must be attached with ______. bolts, screws or rivets ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Support of Suspended Ceiling Luminaires QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 5:47 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 5:47 PM 20. A luminaire directly above a bathtub or shower area (within 8 ft vertically) shall be marked as suitable for damp locations or _____. suitable for wet locations ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Luminaires in Bathrooms QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 5:47 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 5:48 PM 21. Overheating of lighting fixtures, which often results in fires, is most often caused by ____. a. burying recessed fixtures under thermal insulation b. failing to ground metal fixture bodies properly c. burying recessed fixtures under thermal insulation or overlapping d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_07_Luminaires, Ballasts, and Lamps REFERENCES: The Code Requirements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 5:48 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 5:49 PM 22. Recessed luminaires (especially incandescent) have inherent ________. a. grounding issues b. voltage issues c. heat problems d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Recessed Luminaires QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 5:50 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 5:50 PM 23. When a Non-Type IC recessed luminaire gets overheated because of overlamping, mislamping, or being too close to thermal insulation, the ________ trips off. a. circuit breaker b. thermal protector c. fuse d. GFIC receptacle ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Recessed Luminaires QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 5:51 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 5:52 PM 24. Luminaires shall be of such construction or installed so that the conductors in outlet boxes shall not be subjected to _______ greater than that for which the conductors are rated. a. voltages b. currents c. temperatures d. humidity ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: The Purpose of the Junction Box (Wiring Compartment) on a Recessed Luminaire Housing Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_07_Luminaires, Ballasts, and Lamps QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 5:52 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 5:53 PM 25. All fluorescent ballasts installed indoors (except simple reactance-type ballasts), both for new and replacement installations, must have thermal protection built into the ballast. Such ballasts are listed as ______. a. suitable for dry locations b. Protected c. Class P d. Class X ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Class P Ballasts QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 5:54 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 5:55 PM 26. Class P ballast has a case temperature not exceeding _______. a. 185°F b. 194°F c. 200°F d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Class P Ballasts QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 5:57 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 5:58 PM 27. Luminaires must be constructed or installed so that combustible material is not subject to temperatures above ______. a. 80°F b. 90°F c. 100°F d. 110°F ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Other Considerations QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 5:58 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_07_Luminaires, Ballasts, and Lamps DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 5:59 PM 28. UL and the NEC in 410.115(B) require that recessed _______luminaires be equipped with an integral thermal protector to protect against the hazards of overheating. a. fluorescent b. incandescent c. LED d. neon ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Thermal Protection QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 6:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 6:01 PM 29. Junction boxes that come with luminaires have wires rated ________. a. 75°C b. 90°C c. 110°C d. 125°C ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: The Purpose of the Junction Box (Wiring Compartment) on a Recessed Luminaire Housing QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 6:01 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 6:02 PM 30. Recessed ______ luminaires will blink on/off if overheated. a. LED b. incandescent c. fluorescent d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Thermal Protection QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 6:02 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 6:03 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_07_Luminaires, Ballasts, and Lamps 31. Fixture whips are permitted to be a maximum of ____ long between outlet box and fixture. a. 4 ½ feet b. 6 feet c. 6 feet 7 inches (2 meters) d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Connecting Suspended Ceiling Luminaires QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 6:04 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 6:04 PM 32. Horizontal flexible conduit shall be supported at least every ______ feet. a. 3 b. 4 ½ c. 6 d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Connecting Suspended Ceiling Luminaires QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 6:05 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 6:06 PM 33. Ballasts that meet or exceed the federal standards for energy savings are marked with the letter ______in a circle. a. S b. P c. E d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Energy-Saving Ballasts QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 6:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 8:21 AM 34. Electronic ballasts are much lighter in weight and considerably more energy efficient than older style ______ballasts (core and coil). a. steel b. magnetic Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_07_Luminaires, Ballasts, and Lamps c. LED d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Energy-Saving Ballasts QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 6:08 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 6:09 PM 35. Rather than using 40 watts with fluorescent lamps, energy savings can be considerable when using _________. a. 30 watts b. 38 watts c. 32 or 34 watts d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Energy-Saving Ballasts QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 6:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 6:10 PM 36. A high-efficiency ballast might draw a total of _____ volt-amperes, whereas an old-style magnetic ballast might draw _____ volt-amperes. a. 42, 102 b. 45, 105 c. 50, 110 d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Energy-Saving Ballasts QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 6:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 6:12 PM 37. Ballasts provided with built-in thermal protection are listed as ____ ballasts. a. LED b. Class P c. Class T d. all of the above ANSWER: b Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 11

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_07_Luminaires, Ballasts, and Lamps POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Class P Ballasts QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 6:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 6:13 PM 38. Class P ballast has a case temperature not exceeding ______. a. 150°F b. 180°F c. 194°F d. 200°F ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Class P Ballasts QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 6:13 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 6:15 PM 39. Some Class P ballasts have a _________ integral with the capacitor to protect against capacitor leakage. a. solenoid b. thermocouple c. non-resetting fuse d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Class P Ballasts QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 6:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 6:16 PM 40. When the case temperature reaches 230°F (110°C), the thermal protector must open within _____. a. 4 hours b. 15 minutes c. 2 hours d. 1 hour ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Class P Ballasts QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 12

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_07_Luminaires, Ballasts, and Lamps DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 6:16 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 6:17 PM 41. The bare equipment grounding conductor (EGC) from the luminaire connects to the green _________ screw in a metal electrical box. a. round b. square c. oval d. hexagon-shaped ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Class P Ballasts QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 6:17 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:16 AM 42. Chain-suspended luminaires may come with a flat parallel conductor cord. The conductor with grooved insulation is the identified conductor that connects to the ______ circuit conductor. a. black b. green c. white d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Safety Alert QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 6:18 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 6:18 PM 43. According to Article 410.42, all exposed conductive surfaces of luminaires must be ______. a. visible b. reachable c. grounded d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Safety Alert QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 6:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 6:19 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 13

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_07_Luminaires, Ballasts, and Lamps 44. In old homes, if there is no equipment grounding means in the outlet box, an exception permits a separate equipment grounding conductor to be installed in conformance with 250.130(C) at an equipment grounding conductor of another branch circuit, a grounded service conductor, or ________. any accessible point on the grounding electrode system ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Replacing a Luminaire in an Older Home: Will There Be Problems? QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 6:21 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 6:21 PM 45. For suspended ceiling luminaires, grounding of the luminaire is accomplished by installing an equipment grounding conductor between ___________. a. branch circuits b. the outlet box and the luminaire c. the switch and the outlet d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Luminaire Grounding QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 6:20 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/15/2023 6:20 PM

Page 14

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_08_Lighting Branch Circuit for the Front Bedroom 1. General lighting provides ______ illumination for a given area, such as the front hall. It is basic. a. specific b. highlighted c. overall d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: General Lighting QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/15/2023 6:44 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:17 AM 2. ______ lighting provides focus and attention to an object or area in the home. a. Security b. Branch c. Porch d. Accent ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Accent Lighting QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 1:14 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 1:14 AM 3. Many electricians wire the lights and receptacles in a room on different circuits because this ________. a. is required by the NEC b. is required by building codes c. offers the advantage that all power in a room will not go out if the overcurrent protective device trips d. simplifies grounding ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Laying Out General-Purpose Lighting and Receptacle Circuits QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 1:15 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 12:29 AM 4. Task Lighting is sometimes referred to as _______ lighting. a. "specific" b. “activity” c. "sewing" Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_08_Lighting Branch Circuit for the Front Bedroom d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Task Lighting QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 1:16 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 1:16 AM 5. __________ generally includes outdoor lighting, walkway lighting, and all other lighting that serves the purpose of providing lighting for illegal and safety reasons. a. Post top lighting b. General lighting c. Security lighting d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Security Lighting QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 1:17 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 1:17 AM 6. Under the 80% Rule, a 15-ampere, 120 volt maximum connected load would be _______. a. 150 watts b. 120 watts c. 1440 watts d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: The 80% Rule QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 1:17 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 1:18 AM 7. Under the "outlets per circuit" method, _______ the number of outlets by the number of branch circuits. a. add b. multiply c. divide d. square ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_08_Lighting Branch Circuit for the Front Bedroom REFERENCES: Outlets per Circuit Method QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 1:18 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:18 AM 8. General lighting and receptacle loads may be calculated at __________. a. 5 watts per ft2 b. 3 watts per ft2 c. 2 watts per ft2 d. 6 watts per ft2 ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Circuit Loading “Rules of Thumb” QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 1:19 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/25/2023 1:03 AM 9. Except for any restriction in 220.41, dwelling receptacles may be computed as no less than ________ per receptacle. a. 120 volt-amperes b. 180 volt-amperes c. 200 volt-amperes d. 130 volt-amperes ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Determining the Size of Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Junction Boxes, and Conduit QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 1:20 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 1:20 AM 10. In designing a branch circuit, assume load limit of 80% of the branch circuit rating. For a 12 AWG conductor, that would be _______. a. 1500 watts b. 1920 watts c. 1440 watts d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: The 80% Rule QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_08_Lighting Branch Circuit for the Front Bedroom HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 1:21 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:18 AM 11. For estimating purposes, it is often safe to assume that volt-amperes equals ________. a. watts X 1.5 b. watts c. watts X 0.85 d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Estimating Loads for Outlets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 1:54 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 1:55 AM 12. The NEC allows what maximum number of receptacle outlets to be connected on a 120-volt residential lighting or small-appliance branch circuit? a. Eight b. Ten c. Thirteen d. Unlimited ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: How Many Outlets Are Permitted on One General-Purpose Lighting Branch Circuit? QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:03 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 2:05 AM 13. Outlets supplying inductive load shall have the calculation based on the total ampere rating, not on general guidelines. These include ballasts, autotransformers, and ______. LED drivers ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Estimating Loads for Outlets QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:05 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 2:06 AM 14. When using any computation to calculate receptacles needed, remember to _____. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_08_Lighting Branch Circuit for the Front Bedroom divide loads evenly ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: divide loads evenly QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:06 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 2:06 AM 15. How the circuit is run will determine the path, ampacity, and _______ required in each cable. number of conductors ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Drawing a Cable Layout and Wiring Diagram QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:06 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 8:24 AM 16. Residential plans ______ provide the electrician with the location of individual receptacles, luminaires, or switches. a. do b. do not ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Drawing a Cable Layout and Wiring Diagram QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:07 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 2:07 AM 17. On a typical layout, splices are generally displayed by using _______. a. squares b. small dots c. circles d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Drawing the Wiring Diagram of a Lighting Circuit QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:08 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 2:08 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_08_Lighting Branch Circuit for the Front Bedroom 18. A terminal used for more than one conductor shall be ________. a. not allowed b. identified for such use c. permitted d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Drawing the Wiring Diagram of a Lighting Circuit QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:08 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 2:09 AM 19. An important step in preparing the wiring diagram is to mark the ______ of the conductors. a. size b. rating c. color d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Drawing the Wiring Diagram of a Lighting Circuit QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:09 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:19 AM 20. The NEC does not require luminaires in clothes closets but some ________. a. owners may want them b. general contractors may want them c. local codes may require them d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Luminaires in Clothes Closets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:10 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:20 AM 21. Closet contents may present a _______ so there are very specific rules for the location and types of luminaires permitted. a. darkness problem b. shadow problem Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_08_Lighting Branch Circuit for the Front Bedroom c. fire hazard d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Luminaries in Clothes Closets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:11 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:23 AM 22. Incandescent lamps have a ________surface temperature than fluorescent or LED lamps. a. cooler b. same c. higher d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Luminaires in Clothes Closets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:11 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 2:12 AM 23. The only type of luminaire allowed in a closet is surface-mounted or recessed incandescent or LED luminaires with completely enclosed light sources, surface-mounted or recessed fluorescent luminaires, surface-mounted fluorescent or LED luminaires that are identified as __________. suitable for installation within the closet storage space ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Luminaires in Clothes Closets QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:12 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:17 AM 24. A good idea is to have the clothes closet light controlled by a single-pole switch outside the __________. a. house b. bedroom door c. hallway d. closet door ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Lighting Branch Circuit A16 for the Front Bedroom Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_08_Lighting Branch Circuit for the Front Bedroom QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:13 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:18 AM

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_09_Lighting Branch Circuit for the Master Bedroom 1. Master Bedroom receptacles are required to have protection provided by _______ circuit breaker. a. a ground-fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) b. an arc-fault circuit interrupter (AFCI) c. non AFCI circuit interrupter d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:14 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:24 AM 2. AFCI protection is required for _________, in bedrooms, not just ______. a. outlets and devices, GFCI where required b. receptacles, GFCI where required c. lighting circuits, general circuits d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction and Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupters (AFCIs) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:15 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 2:16 AM 3. AFCIs offer superior protection where extension cords and device supply conductors are sometimes run ________ and other locations where overheating is more prevalent. a. through walls b. near hairdryers c. under carpets ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction and Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupters (AFCIs) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:54 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:24 AM 4. All 120-volt, single phase, 10- to 20 amp branch circuit supplying bedroom ______ require AFCI protection. outlets and devices ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_09_Lighting Branch Circuit for the Master Bedroom QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:35 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 2:35 AM 5. One important exception for a dwelling is AFCIs are not required for ______. a. sunrooms b. hallways c. outdoor receptacles d. recreation rooms ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Lighting Branch Circuit A19 for the Master Bedroom QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:36 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:25 AM 6. Paddle fan outlet boxes must be ______ and _______. a. strong, sturdy b. nailed, listed as suitable c. listed, marked as suitable d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Supporting Ceiling-Suspended (Paddle) Fans QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:36 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:28 AM 7. Especially in old work, you _____ of supporting the paddle fan independently. a. always have the choice b. should add devices c. make sure the box is capable d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Old Work QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:41 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_09_Lighting Branch Circuit for the Master Bedroom DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 2:44 AM 8. Additional weight support takes up space, so _____ conductor allowance is required. a. single b. double c. triple d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: What is an Outlet Box System? QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:45 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 2:46 AM 9. Outlet boxes must not be used for sole support of fans weighing more than _________. a. 50 lb. ( 23 kg) b. 100 lb. (45 kg) c. 70 lb (32 kg) d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Supporting Ceiling-Suspended (Paddle) Fans QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:46 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 2:47 AM 10. If designed to support more than _______, required marking shall include the maximum weight to be supported. a. 50 lb (23 kg) b. 35 lb (16 kg) c. 75 lb (34 kg) d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Supporting Ceiling-Suspended (Paddle) Fans QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:48 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/25/2023 12:48 AM 11. Master Bedroom estimated loads might include receptacles, clothes closet luminaires, and a _______. ceiling fan/light ANSWER: Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_09_Lighting Branch Circuit for the Master Bedroom POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Lighting Branch Circuit A19 for the Master Bedroom QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:49 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:26 AM 12. Each receptacle shall be counted as _____ volt-amperes. a. 120 b. 180 c. 200 d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Lighting Branch Circuit A19 for the Master Bedroom QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:49 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 2:50 AM 13. Minimum load calculation for a dwelling is _______. a. 5 volt-amperes per ft2 b. 3 volt-amperes per ft2 c. 7 volt-amperes per ft2 d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Lighting Branch Circuit A19 for the Master Bedroom QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:50 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/25/2023 3:09 AM 14. The type of box to be installed depends on the number of conductors entering the box. Calculate how this is determined. In the example, four cables enter this box for a total of 14 conductors (ten 14 AWG circuit ANSWER: conductors and four equipment grounding conductors). In this example, we have 10 circuit conductors, four equipment grounding conductors (counted as one conductor, or a single volume allowance), four cable clamps (counted as one volume allowance), one single-pole switch (counted as two volume allowances), and one 3-way switch (counted as two volume allowances), for a total of 16 volume allowances or conductors. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_09_Lighting Branch Circuit for the Master Bedroom Count the circuit conductors = 10 Add one for equipment grounding conductors = 1 Add two for each switch = 4 Add one for one or more cable clamps = 1

(314.16 (B)(5)) (314.16 (B)(4)) (314.16 (B)(2))

Total 16 Select a box or assembled box permitted to hold 16 conductors. (Table 314.16(B)(1) requires 2 in3 for 14 AWG and 2.25 in3 per conductor. In this example, select a 2-gang nonmetallic box that has a marked volume of not less than 32 in3. POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Selection of Boxes QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:51 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/25/2023 1:02 AM 15. A raised plaster ring cover, if marked with its cubic-inch volume, ______ the maximum number of conductors permitted for the combined box and raised cover. a. lowers b. can increase c. does not affect d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Selection of Boxes QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:52 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:31 AM 16. How is the calculation made if Weight Supporting Attachment Receptacles and Fittings (WSAR and WSAF) are used to hold a paddle fan? Double conductor allowance is required in example for the support fitting, per ANSWER: 314.16(B)(1), 4 in3 is required for 14 AWG supply conductors, and clamps, straps, fittings, other devices are added to fill calculation. POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Old Work QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_09_Lighting Branch Circuit for the Master Bedroom DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

8/16/2023 2:53 AM 8/25/2023 3:28 AM

17. The Code sections concerned with the size requirements of boxes is __________. a. Article 220 b. Article 230 c. Article 314 d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Selection of Boxes QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:54 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 2:54 AM 18. The box volume calculations can be increased by a raised, marked plaster ring, plaster cover, and _________. domed cover ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Selection of Boxes QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:55 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 8:33 AM 19. Standard boxes may be _____ together to make the required volume. a. separated b. ganged (assembled) c. omitted d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Selection of Boxes QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:55 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:42 AM

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_10_Lighting Branch Circuit—Bathrooms, Hallway 1. Double-insulated appliances normally have ____ power cords and attachment plug caps. a. three-wire b. 16 AWG or larger c. type SJT d. 2-wire ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Double Insulation in Lieu of Grounding QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:06 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 3:07 AM 2. Bathroom receptacles are required to be GFCI protected, either by installing GFCI ______, or by installing GFCI in the panelboard. devices ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:07 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 3:08 AM 3. A bathroom is required to have ____ 20-ampere branch circuits. one or more ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:11 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 1:16 AM 4. AFCI protection _____ required in a bathroom of a dwelling. is not ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:11 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 3:12 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_10_Lighting Branch Circuit—Bathrooms, Hallway 5. Receptacles shall not be installed within _____ ft horizontally of a shower or bathtub. a. 2 b. 3 c. 6 d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Receptacles in Bathtub and Shower Spaces QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:12 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 3:12 AM 6. Bathrooms require one separate 20-ampere branch circuit as long as it doesn’t supply other loads. These must be ______ protected. GFCI ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:13 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 3:13 AM 7. The 20-ampere circuit that serves only the receptacle(s) in a bathroom are also permitted to serve _______. a. hallway receptacles b. outside receptacles c. powder room (1/2 bath) receptacles d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Bathroom Receptacles QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:13 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 3:14 AM 8. Receptacles are not permitted to be installed within a zone measured ____ ft horizontally and ______ ft vertically from the top of the bathtub rim or shower stall. a. 3, 8 b. 3, 10 c. 6, 8 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_10_Lighting Branch Circuit—Bathrooms, Hallway d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Receptacles in Bathtub and Shower Spaces QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:14 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 3:15 AM 9. NEC does not permit any track lighting within _____ horizontally and _____ ft vertically the top of a bathtub rim or top of a shower stall threshold. a. 4 ft (1021 mm), 8 ft (2.5 m) b. 3 ft (900 mm), 8 ft (2.5 m) c. 2 ft (601 mm), 8 ft (2.5 m) d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Supply Voltage QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:17 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:44 AM 10. Receptacles located in hallways are required to have ______. a. AFCI protection b. GFCI protection c. AFCI and GFCI protection if required ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:19 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 3:20 AM 11. A receptacle shall be installed in bathrooms within _____ ft of the outside edge of each sink. a. 3 b. 5 c. 6 ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Receptacles in Bathtub and Shower Spaces QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_10_Lighting Branch Circuit—Bathrooms, Hallway HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 6:44 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 6:46 PM 12. Hallway receptacles require a receptacle if the hallway measures _______ ft. or more in length measured along the centerline of the hallway. a. 5 b. 7 c. 10 d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Receptacle Outlets in Hallways QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:20 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 3:21 AM 13. A second 20-amp branch circuit installed in the bathroom is ____ to feed a receptacle in the hallway. a. allowed b. not allowed c. commonly used ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Bathroom Receptacles QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:21 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 3:22 AM 14. Hallway length is measured along the centerline of the hallway ________. a. by eliminating the widths of the doorways b. without passing through a doorway c. unless it is shorter to follow the baseboards d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Receptacle Outlets in Hallways QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:26 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 3:29 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_10_Lighting Branch Circuit—Bathrooms, Hallway 15. Hallway lighting branch circuit is required to be ___ or ____ amperes. 15 or 20 ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 3:54 AM 16. ________ and/or adequate lighting above and forward of the standing position at the vanity can provide excellent lighting in the bathroom. a. Wall sconces b. Ceiling c. Mirror lighting d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Lighting Branch Circuit A14 for the Hallway and Bathrooms QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 3:43 AM 17. A luminaire directly overhead will light the top of one’s head but will cause ______ on the face. a. irregularities b. color change c. shadows d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Lighting Branch Circuit A14 for the Hallway and Bathrooms QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:48 AM 18. A medicine cabinet above the sink should ideally have _______. a. a receptacle b. a luminaire in each side c. adequate depth d. all of the above ANSWER: b Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_10_Lighting Branch Circuit—Bathrooms, Hallway POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Lighting Branch Circuit A14 for the Hallway and Bathrooms QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:44 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 3:44 AM

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_11_Lighting Branch Circuit—Front Entry, Porch, Post Light, Underground Wiring 1. A doorjamb switch is usually mounted about ____ ft above the floor, on the inside of the 2 x 4 framing on the hinge side of the closet door. a. 3 b. 4 c. 5 d. 6 ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Doorjamb Switch QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:11 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 5:12 AM 2. The single-pole switch just inside the front door controls the receptacle on the porch, a post light, and a _______. porch luminaire ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Post Light Wiring QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:12 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 5:13 AM 3. GFCI protection is required for _____ outdoor receptacles. all ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:13 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 5:14 AM 4. The grounded conductor (neutral) is not required at the doorjamb switch for a luminaire in a hallway or ________. entry ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Doorjamb Switch QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:14 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 5:14 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_11_Lighting Branch Circuit—Front Entry, Porch, Post Light, Underground Wiring 5. The box furnished with a doorjamb switch is generally suitable only for the ________ because of limited space. a. through conductors b. adjacent receptacle conductors c. switch loop conductors d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Doorjamb Switch QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:14 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:49 AM 6. A(n) ________ is a good choice to make a positive first impression on guests. a. post light b. garage light c. entry ceiling light d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:16 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 5:16 AM 7. Luminaires installed where exposed unprotected to the weather must be marked "_______". a. dry locations only b. damp locations only c. suitable for wet locations d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:20 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 5:21 AM 8. Luminaires installed where protected from the weather and not subject to saturation with water are marked "________". a. suitable for dry locations b. suitable for damp locations Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_11_Lighting Branch Circuit—Front Entry, Porch, Post Light, Underground Wiring c. suitable for wet locations d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:21 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 5:22 AM 9. Post light luminaires are often controlled by a _____ that is installed on the post or in the luminaire. a. timer b. receptacle c. photocell d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:22 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 5:23 AM 10. Two stacked single-pole switches are located near the entry to control the ____ and _____ separately. a. entry ceiling, porch b. porch, pole light c. porch, garage d. post light, post receptacle ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:23 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:51 AM 11. Circuit A15 is a rather simple circuit that has two sets of 3-way switches: one set controlling the front entry ceiling luminaire, the other set controlling the ________ and the bracket luminaires on the front of the garage. a. hallway b. porch luminaire c. driveway d. all of the above ANSWER: b Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_11_Lighting Branch Circuit—Front Entry, Porch, Post Light, Underground Wiring POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Circuit A15 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:24 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 5:25 AM 12. The proper size box for circuit B15 is _______. 1. Add the circuit conductors 3 + 3 + 3 + 3 + 3 = 15 ANSWER: 2. Add for equipment grounding wires (count 1 for the first 4 + 0.25 for the fifth) 1.25 3. Add (2 × 4 = 8) for the 4 switch yokes 8 4. Add for cable clamps (count 1 only) 1 Total 25.25 POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Circuit A15 QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:26 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:19 AM 13. Foyers not part of a hallway with an area greater than 60 ft2 require a receptacle in each wall space ____ ft. or wider. a. 3 b. 5 c. 6 d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Circuit A15 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:27 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/22/2023 8:38 AM 14. When using nonmetallic boxes, refer to Table 314.16(B), and base the volume allowance on _______ for each 14 AWG conductor and for the volume allowance for the wiring devices, cable clamps, and equipment grounding conductors. a. 2 in.3 b. 3 in.3 c. 3.5 in.3 d. all of the above ANSWER: a Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_11_Lighting Branch Circuit—Front Entry, Porch, Post Light, Underground Wiring POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Circuit A15 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:28 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:52 AM 15. Doorways, door-side windows that extend to the floor, and ______ shall not be considered wall space in a foyer. similar openings ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Circuit A15 QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:31 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 5:31 AM 16. Switches inside the front door would allow the homeowner to control a receptacle outlet for holiday or other decorative lighting or _______ from inside the dwelling. porch lighting ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction a Post Light Receptacle QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:31 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 5:32 AM 17. A switch inside the front door would allow the homeowner to control a garage luminaire, a post luminaire, or a ______ without leaving the house. porch luminaire ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:32 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 6:03 PM 18. A switch inside the front door would allow the homeowner to control the hallway light, stairway luminaire(s) or _______ remotely. receptacle on porch ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_11_Lighting Branch Circuit—Front Entry, Porch, Post Light, Underground Wiring QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 6:13 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 7:26 AM 19. Any unprotected location exposed to the weather is considered a(n) _______. a. Outdoor location b. damp location c. wet location ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:33 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/22/2023 8:47 AM 20. Luminaires in wet locations are made so that water cannot enter or accumulate in lampholders, ________, or other electrical parts. a. wire nuts b. cables c. wiring compartments d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:34 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 5:35 AM 21. Some inspectors consider the area outside a 45° angle from a roof line or overhang to be a ______ location. a. dry b. damp c. wet ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:35 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 5:36 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_11_Lighting Branch Circuit—Front Entry, Porch, Post Light, Underground Wiring 22. Some inspectors consider the area within a 45° angle from a roof line or overhang to be a ______ location. a. dry b. damp c. wet ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction a Post Light Receptacle QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 6:04 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 6:17 PM 23. A damp location is protected from the weather and not subject to saturation with water or other liquids but may have _____. moderate degrees of moisture ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:37 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 5:38 AM 24. Partially protected areas, roofed open porches or ______ are considered damp locations. areas under canopies ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:38 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 5:38 AM 25. A device such as a receptacle installed on a post fixture installed outdoors is required to be provided with _____ protection. a. AFCI b. GFCI c. may have both AFCI and GFCI ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Post Light Wiring QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_11_Lighting Branch Circuit—Front Entry, Porch, Post Light, Underground Wiring HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:38 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 5:39 AM 26. An outdoor receptacle is required to be provided with _____ protection. a. AFCI b. GFCI c. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Post Light Wiring QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 5:40 AM 27. A post light or similar may require ______ protection if it also serves an indoor area. a. no b. GFCI c. AFCI d. AFCI and GFCI ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Post Light Wiring QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 5:41 AM 28. The depth of cover may be reduced based on having GFCI protection and __________. being rated 20 A or less ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Post Light Wiring QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 5:41 AM 29. Requirements for outdoor installations include the type of cable that is suitable for direct burial and the _____ of wiring for protection against damage. a. width b. ampacity Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_11_Lighting Branch Circuit—Front Entry, Porch, Post Light, Underground Wiring c. depth d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Post Light Wiring QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 7:25 AM 30. Burial depth changes depending on whether the branch circuit has _____. a. sufficient ampacity b. wet location rating c. GFCI protection d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Post Light Wiring QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 7:24 AM

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_12_Lighting Branch Circuit and Small-Appliance Branch Circuits for the Kitchen 1. Kitchen lighting is __________to be supplied by the two 20-ampere small-appliance circuits required for the kitchen and dining room area. a. permitted b. not permitted c. optionally allowed ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Small-Appliance Branch Circuits for Receptacles in the Kitchen QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:55 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 5:56 AM 2. What piece of kitchen equipment is permitted to be connected to the two 20-ampere small-appliance circuits required for the kitchen and dining room area? a. Lighting b. Exhaust fan c. Clock outlet d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Small-Appliance Branch Circuits for Receptacles in the Kitchen QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:56 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 5:57 AM 3. The NEC defines a kitchen as an area with a sink and ____ provisions for food preparation and cooking. a. at least temporary b. permanent c. normal ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Kitchen QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:57 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 5:57 AM 4. The kitchen lighting branch circuit is ______ to be AFCI protected. a. not required b. required c. optionally allowed Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_12_Lighting Branch Circuit and Small-Appliance Branch Circuits for the Kitchen ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Lighting Circuit B7 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:58 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 5:58 AM 5. A “Habitable Room” is a room in a building for living, sleeping or _______. eating ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Operation of the Heat/Vent/Light QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:58 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:21 AM 6. Most manufacturers recommend the range hood exhaust fan/light which is supplied by an individual branch circuit rated ________. a. 15 amperes b. 20 amperes c. 25 amperes ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Lighting Circuit B7 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 5:59 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/22/2023 8:51 AM 7. A combination range hood exhaust fan/light _______ be protected by an AFCI. a. must b. need not ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Kitchen QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 6:00 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 6:01 AM 8. Ductless exhaust fans remove cooking odors but cannot remove ______. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_12_Lighting Branch Circuit and Small-Appliance Branch Circuits for the Kitchen smoke ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Hood-Fan/Microwave Oven Outlet QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 6:02 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:31 AM 9. A range hood and microwave oven/range hood combination is ______ to be cord-and-plug connected. a. allowed b. prohibited ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Hood-Fan/Microwave Oven Outlet QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 6:02 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:52 AM 10. If cord-and-plug connected, a range hood receptacle must be accessible, must be located to avoid physical damage to the flexible cord and __________. must be supplied by an individual branch circuit ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Hood-Fan/Microwave Oven Outlet QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 6:03 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 6:03 AM 11. Receptacles in kitchens must be __________. a. GFCI protected b. AFCI protected c. GFCI and AFCI protected ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Countertops and Work Surfaces in Kitchens QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 6:03 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 6:04 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_12_Lighting Branch Circuit and Small-Appliance Branch Circuits for the Kitchen 12. Receptacles are not permitted to be installed “face up” in countertops or work surfaces unless _________ for that application. a. designed b. listed c. designed and listed ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Countertops and Work Surfaces in Kitchens QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 6:04 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 6:05 AM 13. There must be enough receptacles so that no point along the wall is more than _____ inches, measured horizontally, from a receptacle outlet in that space. a. 20 b. 24 c. 36 d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Countertops and Work Surfaces in Kitchens QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 6:05 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 6:05 AM 14. Receptacles are not permitted below a countertop more than ____ inches beyond its base cabinet. a. 6 b. 12 c. 36 d. 40 ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Countertops and Work Surfaces in Kitchens QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 6:49 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 6:50 PM 15. If using multi outlet assemblies, each _____ of multi outlet assembly containing two or more receptacles installed in individual or continuous lengths counts as _____ receptacle outlet. a. 12 in., 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_12_Lighting Branch Circuit and Small-Appliance Branch Circuits for the Kitchen b. 12 in., 2 c. 12 in., 3 d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Countertops and Work Surfaces in Kitchens QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 6:06 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 6:07 AM 16. GFCI protection can be provided for convenience receptacles serving kitchen countertop areas by ____. a. AFCI circuit breakers b. installing a AFCI-protected receptacle at each location c. installing a single feed-through type GFCI receptacle to protect downstream receptacles d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Small-Appliance Branch Circuits for Receptacles in the Kitchen QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 6:07 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 6:08 AM 17. Many times the most convenient way to protect kitchen branch circuit receptacles is by _______. a. GFCI circuit breakers b. AFCI circuit breakers c. dual function AFCI/GFCI circuit breakers d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Small-Appliance Branch Circuits for Receptacles in the Kitchen QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 6:08 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:23 AM 18. A receptacle installed below the sink for devices such as a food waste disposer are required to be GFCI protected if they are within _______ inches of the sink (horizontally). a. 3 b. 4 c. 6 d. GFCI is required regardless of distance from the sink Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_12_Lighting Branch Circuit and Small-Appliance Branch Circuits for the Kitchen ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Small-Appliance Branch Circuits for Receptacles in the Kitchen QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 6:09 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 6:10 AM 19. A dedicated receptacle supplying a kitchen clock is _______ to be GFCI protected. a. required b. not required ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Small-Appliance Branch Circuits for Receptacles in the Kitchen QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 6:10 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 6:10 AM 20. Small appliance branch circuits in kitchens are _________ to have AFCI protection. a. required b. not required ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Small-Appliance Branch Circuits for Receptacles in the Kitchen QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 6:11 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 6:11 AM 21. Any receptacle under a kitchen sink is ______ to have AFCI protection. a. required b. not required ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Small-Appliance Branch Circuits for Receptacles in the Kitchen QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 6:11 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 6:12 AM 22. A not-easily accessible receptacle behind a refrigerator is _______ to have AFCI protection. a. required Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_12_Lighting Branch Circuit and Small-Appliance Branch Circuits for the Kitchen b. not required ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Small-Appliance Branch Circuits for Receptacles in the Kitchen QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 6:12 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 6:12 AM 23. AFCI/GFCI combination circuit breakers in the panelboard, where required, take the place of ______ receptacles. AFCI and GFCI ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Small-Appliance Branch Circuits for Receptacles in the Kitchen QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 6:12 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 6:13 AM 24. Appliances located in food-preparation areas _____ AFCI protection. a. require b. do not require ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Countertops and Work Surfaces in Kitchens QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 6:13 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 6:13 AM 25. The receptacle outlet for a specific appliance in a kitchen, such as a refrigerator or refrigerator/freezer, ________ to be supplied by an individual branch circuit. a. is permitted b. is not permitted ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Refrigerator Receptacle QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 6:14 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 6:14 AM 26. The NEC ________ refrigerators to be connected to either of the two required 20-ampere small appliance branch Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_12_Lighting Branch Circuit and Small-Appliance Branch Circuits for the Kitchen circuits. a. does permit b. does not permit ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Refrigerator Receptacle QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 6:14 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 6:15 AM 27. Determining if an individual branch circuit for the refrigerator is required is up to the _______. a. electrician b. homeowner c. electrical inspector d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Refrigerator Receptacle QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 6:15 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:23 AM 28. Cord-and-plug-connected appliances connected to multiple-outlet branch circuit are not permitted to exceed _________of the branch-circuit rating. a. 60% b. 70% c. 75% d. 80% ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Small-Appliance Branch Circuits for Receptacles in the Kitchen QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 6:16 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 6:17 AM 29. An individual branch circuit for the refrigerator is not considered a _______ branch circuit. a. lighting b. small appliance c. multi-receptacle d. all of the above Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_12_Lighting Branch Circuit and Small-Appliance Branch Circuits for the Kitchen ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Branch Circuit, Individual QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 6:17 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 6:18 AM 30. Sometimes it becomes more _____ to run one 3-wire circuit rather than installing two 2-wire circuits. a. convenient b. handy c. economical d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Split-Wired Receptacles and Multiwire Circuits QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 6:18 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 6:18 AM 31. Split-wired receptacles can be installed _____. a. wherever GFCI's are required b. mainly in kitchens c. wherever AFCI's are required d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Split-Wired Receptacles and Multiwire Circuits QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 6:19 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 6:19 AM 32. When split-wired receptacles are used, all of the phase ("hot") conductors must be disconnected at the ________ simultaneously. a. receptacle b. panelboard c. junction box d. device ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Split-Wired Receptacles and Multiwire Circuits Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_12_Lighting Branch Circuit and Small-Appliance Branch Circuits for the Kitchen QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 6:20 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 7:29 AM 33. Multiwire branch circuits are typically used to connect appliances such as _____. electric clothes dryers or ranges ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Split-Wired Receptacles and Multiwire Circuits QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 6:21 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 6:21 AM 34. Multiwire branch circuits are typically used where _____ are needed by an appliance. a. 240/208 volts b. 240/480 volts c. 240- and 120- volts d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Split-Wired Receptacles and Multiwire Circuits QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 6:21 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 6:22 AM

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_13_Lighting Branch Circuit for the Living Room 1. A receptacle below a 4-way switch in the corner of a living room is required because the Code requires that a receptacle be installed in any wall space ____ inches or more in width. a. 12 b. 24 c. 36 d. 72 ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Lighting Circuit B17 Overview QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 12:33 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 12:33 PM 2. Any space in a wall ____ ft or more in width (including space measured around corners) requires a receptacle. a. 2 b. 4 c. 5 d. 6 ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Lighting Circuit B17 Overview QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 12:33 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:56 AM 3. You should consider using a 20-ampere rated branch circuit and ____ conductors for the entire branch circuit to reduce voltage drop and help provide adequate ampacity. a. 14 AWG b. 12 AWG c. 10 AWG d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Lighting Circuit B17 Overview QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 12:35 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 12:36 PM 4. A living room does not require a switch-controlled receptacle for lighting but a _____ circuit controlling the lighting may be helpful. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_13_Lighting Branch Circuit for the Living Room a. 4-way b. 3-way c. 2-way d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Lighting Circuit B17 Overview QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 12:38 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 12:39 PM 5. Most of the general lighting for the living room will be provided by ______. a. table lamps and floor lamps b. valence lamps ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Lighting Circuit B17 Overview QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 12:39 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 12:39 PM 6. Track lighting may not be installed _______. a. in damp or wet locations b. where subject to damage c. within 3 ft horizontally from a bathtub d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Lighting Track and the Code QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 12:40 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:25 AM 7. Lighting tracks in residential installations are required to be supported twice if the track is not more than ____ ft, and shall have one additional support for each additional ____ ft of track. a. 5, 5 b. 6, 6 c. 4, 4 d. 8, 8 ANSWER: c Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_13_Lighting Branch Circuit for the Living Room POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Lighting Track and the Code QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 12:46 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 7:37 AM 8. For home track lighting installation, it is necessary to add ____ watts for the purpose of branch circuit, feeder, or service-entrance calculations. a. 200 b. 500 c. zero d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Load Calculations for Track Lighting QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 12:47 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 12:49 PM 9. Lighting track in residential installations must be listed by ______. a. NFPA b. OSHA c. a qualified testing laboratory d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Lighting Track and the Code QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 12:50 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 12:51 PM 10. Track is generally fastened to the ceiling with _____. a. machine screws b. staples c. toggle bolts and screws d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Track Lighting (Article 410, Part XIV) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_13_Lighting Branch Circuit for the Living Room HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 12:52 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 12:52 PM 11. The most common type of dimmer used in residential applications is rated ____ watts, 125 VAC, and 60 hertz. a. 100 b. 250 c. 600 d. 800 ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Electronic Dimmers QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 12:53 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 12:53 AM 12. Electronic dimmers offer many features such as LED nightlight, soft start when changing from OFF to the desired setting, and ________. returning to the previous setting after a power outage. ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Electronic Dimmers QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 12:55 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 12:56 AM 13. Electronic dimmers use triacs to “chop” the ac sine wave, so some incandescent lamps might “hum” because the lamp filament vibrates. This hum can usually be eliminated or greatly reduced by either turning the dimmer setting to a different brightness level or _______. changing the lamp ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Electronic Dimmers QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 12:56 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 12:56 PM 14. To dim fluorescent lamps, special dimming ballasts and special dimmer switches allows the dimming ballast to ____________ in the arc. vary the current flowing ANSWER: POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_13_Lighting Branch Circuit for the Living Room REFERENCES: Dimming Fluorescent Lamps QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 12:56 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 7:39 AM 15. Some LED lamps reduce energy use and can be _______. a. rough duty b. impervious to spikes c. dimmable d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Dimming LED Lighting QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 12:57 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:57 AM

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_14_Lighting Branch Circuit for the Study_Bedroom 1. Valence lighting luminaires light sources can be fluorescent or ______. LED ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Valance Lighting QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:01 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 2:01 PM 2. If the ________ luminaires used for the valance lighting are to have a dimmer control, then special dimming ballasts would be required. a. incandescent b. fluorescent c. LED d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Valance Lighting QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:08 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 7:45 AM 3. Feeders or branch circuit conductors within _______ of a ballast, LED driver, power supply or transformer shall have an insulation temperature rating not lower than 90°C (194°F), unless supplying a luminaire marked as suitable for a different insulation temperature. a. 2-inches (50mm) b. 6-inches (152mm) c. 3-inches (75mm) d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Valance Lighting QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:09 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 2:10 PM 4. When designing a home office, you could consider roughing in more wall receptacles than the NEC ____. a. maximum b. recommends c. minimum Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_14_Lighting Branch Circuit for the Study_Bedroom d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Circuit A21Overview QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 2:11 PM 5. When wiring a study/bedroom, consider using 12 AWG conductors, especially for home-runs if not throughout. The main purpose is it will _______. a. maximize ampacity b. prevent mutual interference c. minimize voltage drop d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Circuit A21Overview QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:29 AM 6. The circuit breaker supplying the study/bedroom shall be a/an ________. a. AFCI type b. GFI type c. time-delay type d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Circuit A21Overview QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:14 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 2:16 PM 7. A study/bedroom is perfect to consider a multi-wire circuit. The bedroom in this book requires _________. a. two 3-way switches b. four 3-way switches c. three 3-way switches d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_14_Lighting Branch Circuit for the Study_Bedroom REFERENCES: Circuit A21Overview QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 7:46 AM 8. A study will need a lot of outlets. Consider increasing the number of receptacles by exceeding the NEC minimums as practical or _______. consider running more than one branch circuit for the receptacles ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Circuit A21Overview QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 2:20 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:29 AM

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_15_Dryer Outlet, Lighting, and Receptacle Circuits for the Laundry, Powder Room, Rear Entry Hall, and Attic 1. A powder room is considered a bathroom if it has a basin, plus one or more of the following: _______, or similar plumbing fixtures. a. a toilet b. a tub c. a bidet d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Receptacle Branch Circuit B21 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:08 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 7:47 AM 2. All 125-volt through 250-volt receptacles within _____ feet of the outside edge of a sink shall be GFCI protected. a. 3 b. 4 c. 5 d. 6 ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Receptacle Branch Circuit B21 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:14 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 3:14 PM 3. A bathroom is required to have one or more separate ______ V, _____ A branch circuit(s) installed for receptacle outlets. a. 120, 15 b. 120, 20 c. 125, 20 d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Receptacle Branch Circuit B21 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:14 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 3:15 PM 4. A receptacle outlet is required to be located within _____ feet of the outside edge of the sink. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_15_Dryer Outlet, Lighting, and Receptacle Circuits for the Laundry, Powder Room, Rear Entry Hall, and Attic a. 3 b. 4 c. 5 d. 6 ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Receptacle Branch Circuit B21 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 3:16 PM 5. Receptacles in bathrooms must be _____ protected. a. GFCI b. overvoltage c. AFCI d. both GFCI and AFCI ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Receptacle Branch Circuit B21 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:16 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 3:17 PM 6. Electric washer/dryer combinations generally require a _______ ampere branch circuit similar to that required for a typical electric clothes dryer. a. 15 b. 20 c. 30 d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Combination Washer/Dryers QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:18 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 3:19 PM 7. For 30-ampere branch circuits for combination washer/dryers, a separate 120-volt, single-phase, ________-ampere 3wire branch circuit is required. a. 15 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_15_Dryer Outlet, Lighting, and Receptacle Circuits for the Laundry, Powder Room, Rear Entry Hall, and Attic b. 20 c. 30 d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Combination Washer/Dryers QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 3:21 PM 8. The branch circuit or outlet supplying the clothes dryer where appropriate is required to have _____ if located in the laundry room. a. GFCI protection b. AFCI protection c. GFCI and AFCI protection d. none of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Receptacle Outlets - Laundry QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:22 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 12:58 AM 9. Detail the load calculation for a clothes dryer. The electric clothes dryer in this residence has a nameplate rating of 5700 watts. This ANSWER: calculates out to be

POINTS: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

Because wiring devices used for dryer circuits are rated at 30-amperes, we have a minimum 30-ampere branch-circuit rating requirement. The minimum branch-circuit rating for the electric clothes dryer was found to be 30amperes, and that is the minimum rating of the overcurrent protective device—fuses or circuit breaker. According to Table 310.16, the ampacity for a 10 AWG copper conductor is 30-amperes in the 60°C column. The non-metallic-sheathed cable contains three 10 AWG conductors plus a 10 AWG equipment grounding conductor. Where EMT is used as the wiring method, Table C1, Annex C of the NEC shows that three 10 AWG THHN conductors require trade size 1⁄2 EMT. 1 Load Calculations Essay

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_15_Dryer Outlet, Lighting, and Receptacle Circuits for the Laundry, Powder Room, Rear Entry Hall, and Attic HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:25 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 3:29 PM 10. The branch circuit overcurrent protective device must not exceed _____. a. the wire size b. 110% of the full load amperage of the appliance c. that which is specified as the maximum for the circuit supplying the appliance d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Overcurrent Protection for Branch Circuit QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:32 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 6:59 AM 11. NEC 210.52(F) requires at least one receptacle outlet to be installed in areas designated for the _______. a. kitchen equipment b. bathroom c. laundry equipment d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Receptacle Outlets - Laundry QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:33 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 3:34 PM 12. NEC 210.12(B)(13) requires that the branch circuit(s) supplying all ______ volt, ____ phase, 15- and 20-ampere outlets and devices in the laundry area be protected by an AFCI device. a. 115, 1 b. 120, 1 c. 240, 3 d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Receptacle Outlets - Laundry QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_15_Dryer Outlet, Lighting, and Receptacle Circuits for the Laundry, Powder Room, Rear Entry Hall, and Attic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:34 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 3:35 PM 13. All 125-volt through 250-volt receptacles supplied by single-phase branch circuits rated 150- volts or less to ground that are installed in laundry areas that are within _____ feet of the laundry sink are also required to have GFCI protection. a. 3 b. 5 c. 6 d. 10 ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Receptacle Outlets - Laundry QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:37 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 7:00 AM 14. An additional 20-ampere branch circuit for the laundry area supplies the other two receptacles in the laundry room that can be used for plugging in a sewing machine an iron, radio, or other _______. plug-in appliances ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Receptacle Outlets - Laundry QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:39 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 3:39 PM 15. Exhaust fans have a very low power requirement, in the order of ________. a. 50 volt-amperes b. 70 volt-amperes c. 90 volt-amperes d. 120 volt-amperes ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Exhaust Fans QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:40 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 3:41 PM 16. There is an exception in 210.8 (A) for the receptacle that is an integral part of these laundry fan assemblies. They are Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_15_Dryer Outlet, Lighting, and Receptacle Circuits for the Laundry, Powder Room, Rear Entry Hall, and Attic _____ protected. a. required to be AFCI b. required to be GFCI c. not required to be GFCI ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Exhaust Fans QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:41 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 3:42 PM 17. If a ceiling-mounted fan is used, sheet-metal _____ must be installed between the fan unit and the outside of the house. a. separation b. duct c. housing d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Exhaust Fans QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:42 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 3:42 PM 18. Exhaust fans can have an integral pull-chain switch for starting and stopping, or it is far more common practice to control exhaust fans with a separate_______. a. thermostat b. breaker c. wall switch d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Exhaust Fans QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:43 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 3:44 PM 19. To provide better humidity control, both ceiling-mounted and wall-mounted fans may be controlled with a _______. a. thermostat Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_15_Dryer Outlet, Lighting, and Receptacle Circuits for the Laundry, Powder Room, Rear Entry Hall, and Attic b. pull chain c. humidistat d. wall switch ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Exhaust Fans QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:45 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 3:45 PM 20. NEC 210.70(C) requires that at least one lighting outlet be installed in an attic if it is used for storage or has _________. a. air conditioning b. heating c. any equipment that requires servicing d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Attic Lighting and Pilot Light Switches QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:45 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 7:00 AM 21. The attic requires a 125-volt, single-phase, 15- or 20-ampere receptacle be installed in an accessible location within ____ feet of air conditioning or heating equipment. a. 15 b. 20 c. 25 d. 30 ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Attic Lighting and Pilot Light Switches QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:47 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 3:47 PM 22. If the attic in a residence is served by a folding storable ladder, a switch control in the _____ is not required. a. adjacent hallway b. attic Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_15_Dryer Outlet, Lighting, and Receptacle Circuits for the Laundry, Powder Room, Rear Entry Hall, and Attic c. bedroom d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Attic Lighting and Pilot Light Switches QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:48 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 7:48 AM 23. If the attic light switch has a neon pilot light in the handle, the switch does not need a _____. a. neutral connection b. grounded circuit connection c. additional switch d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Attic Lighting and Pilot Light Switches QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:48 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 1:03 AM 24. Cables must be protected by _____ under several circumstances if in accessible attics. a. guard strips b. metal conduit c. ducts d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Installation of Cable in Attics QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 3:50 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 3:50 PM

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_16_Branch Circuits for the Garage and Outdoors 1. The recommended approach to provide adequate lighting in a residential garage is to install one _______-watt lamp on the ceiling above each side of an automobile. a. 40 b. 60 c. 75 d. 100 ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Lighting a Typical Residential Garage QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 4:04 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 4:05 PM 2. A 15- or 20-ampere branch circuit that originates in the laundry room may be brought into the _____ to supply the lighting outlets. a. bedroom b. den c. garage d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Lighting Branch Circuit B14 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 4:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 4:07 PM 3. A typical lampholder arrangement in a garage is ______ more lampholders than vehicle spaces. a. two b. one c. four d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Lighting a Typical Residential Garage QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 4:13 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 4:14 PM 4. Some localities require an individual 20-ampere branch circuit for the ________ operator. overhead garage door ANSWER: Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_16_Branch Circuits for the Garage and Outdoors POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Want More Than Code Minimum? QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 4:14 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 4:15 PM 5. Branch circuits in the garage are not required to have AFCI protection by NEC ® 210.12(B) because the garage is not considered to be _______. a. important b. a shock risk c. "habitable space” d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Want More Than Code Minimum? QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 4:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 1:06 AM 6. At least one _______ volt, _____-ampere additional branch circuit shall be installed to supply receptacle outlets in attached garages. a. 240, 20 b. 120, 15 c. 120, 20 d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Garage Branch Circuits QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 4:18 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 4:19 PM 7. The garage circuit shall be permitted to supply _______ receptacle outlets. a. bedroom b. outdoor c. any habitable room d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_16_Branch Circuits for the Garage and Outdoors REFERENCES: Garage Branch Circuits QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 4:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 4:20 PM 8. NEC 210.52(G)(1) states: In each attached garage and in each detached garage with electric power, at least one receptacle outlet shall be installed in each vehicle bay and not more than _________ feet above the floor.* a. 8 b. 7 c. 5 ½ d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Receptacle Branch Circuit B23 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 4:20 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 4:21 PM 9. NEC 210.8(A) (2) requires that all usual 120 volt circuits installed in garages with electric power have _____ protection. a. GFCI b. AFCI c. both AFCI and GFCI ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Safety Alert QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 4:22 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 4:23 PM 10. If a detached garage has no electricity provided, then _____ are applicable. a. GFCI breakers still b. no rules c. GFCI and AFCI still d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Safety Alert QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_16_Branch Circuits for the Garage and Outdoors DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 4:24 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 4:26 PM 11. If low-voltage lighting products are marked for use in damp or wet locations, the maximum voltage rating is _____ volts unless live parts are made inaccessible to contact during normal use. a. 10 b. 15 c. 20 d. 25 ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Landscape Lighting QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 4:29 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 4:29 PM 12. Low-voltage luminaires are lighting systems intended for specific applications, such as surface installations, or suspended or ______ installations, are so marked. recessed ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Landscape Lighting QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 4:30 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 4:30 PM 13. Low-voltage landscape lighting systems, which are generally used outdoors in wet locations _________. a. must be listed for the application b. can be indoor types c. do not require any listing d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: More about Low-Voltage Lighting Systems QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 4:30 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 4:31 PM 14. Low-voltage lighting systems are required to operate at no greater than _______. a. 15 volts Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_16_Branch Circuits for the Garage and Outdoors b. 25 volts c. 30 volts ac or 60 volts dc d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: More about Low-Voltage Lighting Systems QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 4:32 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 4:33 PM 15. Low-voltage lighting systems must not be installed _________. a. indoors b. within 10 ft of pools (unless allowed in Art. 680) c. in garages d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: More about Low-Voltage Lighting Systems QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 4:34 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 4:35 PM 16. Type _____ cable is permitted to be used for direct burial applications. a. NMB b. UF c. NMS d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Wiring with Type UF Cable (Article 340) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 4:35 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 4:37 PM 17. Metallic conduit buried underground must be protected against ____. a. backhoes b. corrosion c. galvanic action d. all of the above ANSWER: b Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_16_Branch Circuits for the Garage and Outdoors POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Installation of Conduit Underground QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 4:38 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 4:39 PM 18. The minimum depth for a 120-volt, 15-ampere, GFCI-protected circuit to an outdoor pole light run under a paved driveway is ____. a. 6 inches b. 12 inches c. 18 inches d. 24 inches ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Installation of Conduit Underground QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 4:39 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 4:40 PM 19. Many electrical inspection authorities require an equipment grounding conductor of the wire type be installed ________. a. only in EMT underground conduits b. in all underground circuits c. only in conduit in concrete d. only under driveways ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Installation of Conduit Underground QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 4:40 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 4:41 PM 20. Direct-burial cable is normally required to have a minimum of 24 inches of earth cover. Conditions under which the minimum depth can be reduced to 12 inches for residential occupancies when the branch circuit is not over 120 volts, is GFCI protected, and the overcurrent protection is not over _______. a. 15-amperes b. 20-amperes c. 30-amperes d. all of the above ANSWER: b Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_16_Branch Circuits for the Garage and Outdoors POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Installation of Conduit Underground QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 4:42 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 4:42 PM 21. The maximum current draw for a typical overhead door operator is 5-amperes. Some electrical inspectors insist that a ________. a. 15 amp fuse is needed b. 10 amp fuse is required c. separate branch circuit be run d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Overhead Garage Door Operator QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 4:44 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 4:44 PM 22. Residential overhead garage door operators are required to have an inherent _____ that reverses the door when sensing an obstruction is detected. a. radar control b. disconnect means c. “entrapment protection system” d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Overhead Garage Door Operator QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 4:45 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 4:47 PM 23. The photoelectric sensor must be mounted no higher than ______ inches above the garage floor. a. 3 b. 6 c. 9 d. 12 ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Where to Locate the Receptacle Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_16_Branch Circuits for the Garage and Outdoors QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 4:49 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 4:49 PM 24. The maximum locked-rotor current of the operator plus lamps and other devices must not exceed ____. a. 5-amperes b. 7-amperes c. 10-amperes d. 15-amperes ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Overhead Garage Door Operator QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 4:49 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 4:51 PM 25. The maximum length of a power cord is ________. a. 3 ft. b. 4 ft. c. 5 ft. d. 6 ft. ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Overhead Garage Door Operator QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 4:51 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 4:52 PM 26. If the branch circuit and receptacle are installed for the electric vehicle charging system, ________ must be provided in the feeder or service where the branch circuit originates. a. higher voltage b. additional capacity c. larger conductors d. nothing extra ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Overhead Garage Door Operator QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 4:53 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_16_Branch Circuits for the Garage and Outdoors DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 4:54 PM 27. NEC Article 625.41 requires that the overcurrent protection for feeders and branch circuits supplying electric vehicle supply equipment (EVSE) be sized for a continuous load and be rated ________ of the maximum load of the equipment. a. 85% b. 100% c. 125% d. 135% ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Electric Vehicle Charging Systems QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 4:55 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 4:56 PM 28. Providing a ____ -ampere receptacle and branch circuit is a reasonable assumption. This limits the size of the EVSE equipment to one that draws 32A or less, which may be insufficient. a. 25 b. 30 c. 40 d. 50 ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Electric Vehicle Charging Systems QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 4:56 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 4:57 PM 29. It is a good possibility that a _____ -ampere service might not be sufficient. a. 100 b. 150 c. 200 d. 300 ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Electric Vehicle Charging Systems QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 4:57 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 4:58 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_16_Branch Circuits for the Garage and Outdoors 30. Some local jurisdictions have made these EV charging outlets ____. a. optional b. mandatory c. at least 30 amperes minimum d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Standards Relating to Fire, Smoke, Carbon Monoxide, and Security Devices QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/16/2023 4:58 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/16/2023 4:59 PM

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_17_Recreation Room 1. A multiwire branch circuit or a 3-wire branch circuit is sometimes referred to as a branch ___________circuit. shared-neutral ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Receptacles and Wet Bar QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:57 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 1:57 AM 2. In a multiwire branch circuit, two or more ungrounded conductors that share a neutral conductor of the system, the neutral carries only the difference of the “hot” conductors. This means _____voltage drop and ___ wattage than two separate 2-wire circuits. a. more; less b. same; more c. less; less ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Receptacles and Wet Bar (B9-11) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:57 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 1:58 AM 3. A 3-wire branch circuit has _______ less wire(s) than two separate circuits. a. one b. two c. three d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Advantages of a 3-Wire Branch Circuit QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:58 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 1:59 AM 4. Explain how to calculate the resistance with two 2-wire circuits versus one shared neutral circuit. From Chapter 9, Table 8 in the NEC, the resistance of 50 ft (15 m) is 0.154 ohms. This is ANSWER: found in Recetacle and Wet Bar (B9-11). Resistance of two 2-wire circuits is 4 X 0.154 ohms = 0.616 ohms (4 carry current). Resistance of a shared neutral circuit is 2 X 0.154 ohms = 0.308 ohms (2 carry current). POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_17_Recreation Room REFERENCES: Receptacles and Wet Bar (B9-11) QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:59 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 1:59 AM 5. A multiwire branch circuit has fewer current-carrying wires than would be the case with two separate two-wire circuits. This might result in _______ and less _______. a. smaller gage sizes, voltage b. less resistance, light flicker c. smaller raceway, derating d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Advantages of a 3-Wire Branch Circuit QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 2:00 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 1:58 AM 6. Luminaires will have to be spaced in increments of _____ feet, if there is no dropped ceiling, or the drop is not as much as the height of the luminaires. a. 2 to 3 b. 4 c. 6 d. 10 ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: No Dropped Ceiling QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 2:01 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 2:01 AM 7. Luminaires marked “Recessed Fluorescent Luminaire” are intended for installation in _______ in ceilings and walls and are to be wired according to NEC®. a. drop ceilings b. cavities c. anywhere d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_17_Recreation Room REFERENCES: Recreation Room Lighting (B9, 11, 12) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 2:01 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 2:02 AM 8. Junction boxes are mounted above a dropped (suspended) ceiling usually within _______ of the intended luminaire location. a. 6 to 8 inches b. 8 to 10 inches c. 12 to 24 inches d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Recreation Room Lighting QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 2:03 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 2:04 AM 9. A flexible conduit or cable-type wiring method, often referred to as a(n) ________in the field, 4 to 6 ft (1.2 to 1.8 m) long, is installed between the junction box and the luminaire. a. extension b. branch addition c. fixture addition d. fixture whip ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Recreation Room Lighting (B9, 11, 12) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 2:05 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 2:06 AM 10. Luminaires might bear a label stating "Suitable for Use in Suspended Ceilings.” If so labeled, these luminaires are intended only for installation in suspended ceilings and ____________. a. are necessary for support b. add rigidity c. are not part of the building structure d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Recreation Room Lighting (B9, 11, 12) Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_17_Recreation Room QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 2:06 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 8:27 AM 11. Determine the watts loss and voltage drop in the following example: 2 devices, 10-ampere load, distance from the load to the source is 50 ft. The conductor size is 14 AWG solid, uncoated copper. From Table 8 in Chapter 9 in the NEC ®, we find that the resistance of 1000 ft (300 m) of ANSWER: a 14 AWG uncoated copper conductor is 3.07 ohms (10.1 ohms/km). The resistance of 50 ft (15 m) is

TWO 2-WIRE BRANCH CIRCUITS Watts loss in each current-carrying conductor is Watts = R = 10 × 10 × 0.154 = 15.4 watts Watts loss in all four current-carrying conductors is 15.4 × 4 = 61.6 watts Voltage drop in each current-carrying conductor is = IR = 10 × 0.154 = 1.54 volts for both current-carrying conductors in each circuit: 2 × 1.54 = 3.08 volts Voltage available at load: 120 − 3.08 = 116.92 volts ONE 3-WIRE BRANCH CIRCUIT (Figure 17-5) Watts loss in each current-carrying conductor is Watts = R = 10 × 10 × 0.154 = 15.4 watts Watts loss in both current-carrying conductors is 15.4 × 2 = 30.8 watts Voltage drop in each current-carrying conductor is = IR = 10 × 0.154 = 1.54 volts for both current-carrying conductors is 2 × 1.54 = 3.08 volts Voltage available at loads: 240 – 3.08 = 236.92 volts Voltage available at each load:

POINTS: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

1 Receptacles and Wet Bar Essay

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_17_Recreation Room HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 2:07 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 2:14 AM 12. Describe a methodology for calculating watts loss and voltage drop. Resistance of the wire can be found in Table 8 in Chapter 9 in the NEC ®. ANSWER: Watts loss = R in each current-carrying conductor Voltage drop in each current-carrying conductor is = IR In each two-wire circuit, don't forget to count the values for the neutral as a currentcarrying conductor plus the phase conductor. In a three-wire circuit, the neutral doesn't count as a current carrying conductor. POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Recreation Room Lighting (B9, 11, 12) QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 2:15 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 2:05 AM 13. Compared to separate 2-wire circuits, a 3-wire circuit has what type of watts loss? a. higher watts loss b. same watts loss c. less watts loss ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Recreation Room Lighting (B9, 11, 12) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 2:17 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 2:18 AM 14. When connecting a multiwire (3-wire) circuit in the panel, care must be used to ensure that the two “hot” circuit conductors are connected to opposite phases in the panel or the neutral _______. a. might be overloaded b. shouldn't be affected c. will be zero amperes d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Safety Alert QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_17_Recreation Room HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 2:18 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 2:19 AM 15. Due to fewer current carrying conductors, a 3-wire circuit has _____ voltage drop than separate 2-wire circuits. a. less b. same c. more ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Advantages of a 3-Wire Branch Circuit QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 2:19 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 2:20 AM 16. Conductors in a ____ fixture whip in a typical suspended ceiling “lay-in” fluorescent luminaire must have a temperature rating as required on the label in the luminaire. a. rigid b. flexible c. split d. suspended ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Recreation Room Lighting (B9, 11, 12) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 2:20 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 2:20 AM 17. A fixture whip is ____ feet long and is installed between the junction box and the luminaire. a. 1 to 2 b. 3 to 5 c. 4 to 6 d. 8 to 10 ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Recreation Room Lighting (B9, 11, 12) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 2:20 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 2:21 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_17_Recreation Room 18. Fixture whips are considered tap conductors and are sized appropriately. Minimum ampacity is noncontinuous load plus ____ of continuous load. a. 110% b. 120% c. 125% d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Recreation Room Lighting (B9, 11, 12) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 2:50 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 2:51 AM 19. A 3-wire branch circuit uses less wire than two separate 2-wire circuits. That means less voltage drop and _____. less watts loss ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Advantages of a 3-Wire Branch Circuit QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 2:51 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 2:52 AM 20. A 3-wire circuit has the disadvantage of possible burnout of equipment if the _____ conductor opens. a. phase b. ground c. neutral d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Disadvantages of a 3-Wire Branch Circuit QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 2:52 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 2:53 AM 21. A 3-wire circuit has the disadvantage of working with _____ volts present in the outlet and device boxes when troubleshooting. a. 120 b. 240 c. 177 d. all of the above Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_17_Recreation Room ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Disadvantages of a 3-Wire Branch Circuit QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 2:53 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 2:54 AM 22. Because there are fewer wires, there may be a smaller _______. a. phase conductor b. raceway c. equipment grounding conductor d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Advantages of a 3-Wire Branch Circuit QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 2:54 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:31 AM 23. Because a multiwire circuit requires fewer wires, less ________ might result. a. outages b. need for correcting ampacity c. breaker capacity d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Advantages of a 3-Wire Branch Circuit QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 2:55 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 7:04 AM 24. With multi-wire branch circuits, ______ may not simultaneously disconnect all relevant conductors. a. fuses b. older circuit breakers c. switches d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Disadvantages of a 3-Wire Branch Circuit QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_17_Recreation Room HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 2:56 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 2:57 AM 25. For the multiwire branch circuit if you accidentally open the neutral, the equipment will see ______ the usual voltage. a. triple b. double c. 1.5 times d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Disadvantages of a 3-Wire Branch Circuit QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 2:58 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 2:58 AM 26. A shock hazard exists when one circuit breaker of a multiwire branch circuit (shared neutral circuit) is opened and the ____ connection is broken. a. phase b. neutral c. grounding d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Disadvantages of a 3-Wire Branch Circuit QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 2:58 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 2:59 AM 27. Usual single pole ______ are not designed to function on branch circuits where the neutral is shared. a. circuit breakers b. snap switches c. AFCIs and GFCIs d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Disadvantages of a 3-Wire Branch Circuit QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:00 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:00 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_17_Recreation Room 28. Special circuitry is required for circuit breakers that provide ______ protection for multiwire branch circuits. a. fuse b. snap switch c. AFCI and GFCI d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Disadvantages of a 3-Wire Branch Circuit QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:01 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:03 AM

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_18_Lighting Branch Circuit, Receptacle Circuits for Workshop 1. In unfinished basements, nonmetallic-sheathed cables made up of conductors smaller than two 6 AWG or three _____ must be run through holes bored in joists, or on running boards. a. 8 AWG b. 10 AWG c. 4 AWG d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Cable Installation in Basements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:13 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:13 AM 2. In many parts of the country, the wiring method in unfinished basements is nonmetallic-sheathed cable in the ceiling and __________ on the walls for receptacles and switches. a. rigid conduit b. intermediate metal conduit c. electrical metallic tubing d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Cable in Ceilings—EMT on Walls QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:14 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:14 AM 3. To ensure that the conductor insulation will not be injured, be sure to ream the cut ends of rigid conduit and electrical metallic tubing to remove ____. a. rough edges only b. loose ends c. burrs only d. rough edges and burrs ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Conduit Installation in Basements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:15 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:16 AM 4. Local electrical codes _____ permit cable wiring in unfinished basements other than where absolutely necessary. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_18_Lighting Branch Circuit, Receptacle Circuits for Workshop a. must b. may or may not c. cannot ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Conduit Installation in Basements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:16 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:17 AM 5. Outlet boxes are usually attached to masonry walls with lead or plastic anchors, concrete nails, or _________. power-actuated studs ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Conduit Installation in Basements QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:18 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:18 AM 6. AFCI protection is not required for the unfinished basement area, NEC 210.12(B). GFCI protection is ______ for the receptacles located in a basement, NEC 210.8(A)(5). a. not required b. required ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:18 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 8:33 AM 7. NEC 210.52(G)(3) says at least one ______ receptacle outlet is required in each unfinished basement area. a. AFCI-protected b. GFCI- protected c. both AFCI and GFCI ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:21 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_18_Lighting Branch Circuit, Receptacle Circuits for Workshop DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:22 AM 8. All ______ receptacles, including basements, that are supplied by single-phase branch circuits rated 150 volts or less to ground shall be GFCI-protected. a. 125-250 volt b. 130-volt c. 120-volts or higher d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Receptacle Outlets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:22 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:23 AM 9. If the laundry area is in the basement, then a GFCI-protected receptacle outlet must also be installed for the laundry equipment, NEC 210.52(F). This additional receptacle must be within ____ ft of the intended washer location. a. 4 b. 5 c. 6 d. 8 ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Receptacle Outlets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:23 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:23 AM 10. NEC Chapter 9 has established allowable conductor fill for conduits and tubing. For three or more conductors, the allowable fill is ______. a. 35% b. 40% c. 45% d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Percent Fill QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:24 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:24 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_18_Lighting Branch Circuit, Receptacle Circuits for Workshop 11. Explain the process to determine the fill calculation for raceways if all the conductors are the same size. Determine how many conductors are to be installed in the raceway. ANSWER: Refer to Tables C1 through C12A in Informative Annex C of the NEC for the type of conduit, tubing, or raceway and for the specific size and type of conductors. Select the proper size raceway directly from the table. POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: All Conductors the Same Size and Insulation Type QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:25 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:26 AM 12. As an example of conductor fill, the number of 10 AWG THW conductors that may be pulled into a trade size 3/4 EMT would be __________. a. 6 b. 7 c. 8 d. 10 ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: All Conductors the Same Size and Insulation Type QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:26 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:27 AM 13. When conductors are different sizes or have different insulation types, the procedure to follow is __________. Refer to Chapter 9, Table 5, of the NEC. ANSWER: Determine the size and insulation type of conductors used to determine the approximate cross-sectional area in sq. in (in2) of the conductors. Refer to Chapter 9, Table 8, for the in.2 area of any bare conductors in the raceway. Total the areas of all conductors. Refer to Chapter 9, Table 4, for the type and size of raceway used. Determine the minimum size raceway based on the total in.2 area of the conductors and the allowable in.2 area fill for the particular type of raceway used. The sum must not exceed the allowable percentage fill of the cross-sectional in.2 area of the raceway used. POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Conductors of Different Sizes and/or Insulation Types QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_18_Lighting Branch Circuit, Receptacle Circuits for Workshop DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

8/17/2023 3:27 AM 8/17/2023 3:30 AM

14. A feeder to an electric furnace is fed with two 3 AWG THHN conductors plus one green THHN insulated equipment grounding conductor. This feeder is installed in EMT. The feeder overcurrent protection is 100-amperes. The minimum size EMT to be installed would be ______. According to Table 250.122, the minimum size equipment grounding conductor for a 100ANSWER: ampere feeder is 8 AWG copper. Find the in.2 area of the conductors in Table 5, Chapter 9, NEC. Two 3 AWG THHN 0.0973 in.2 × 2 = 0.1946 in.2 One 8 AWG THHN Total Area 0.2312 in.2 From Table 4, Chapter 9, NEC: 40% fill for trade size 3⁄4 EMT = 0.213 in.2 40% fill for trade size 1 EMT = 0.346 in.2 Therefore, install trade size 1 EMT. POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Conductors of Different Sizes and/or Insulation Types QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:30 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:33 AM 15. If three 6 AWG THW conductors and two 8 AWG THW conductors are to be installed in one EMT, the proper size EMT would be _________. Find the in.2 area of the conductors in NEC Chapter 9, Table 5. ANSWER: Three 6 AWG THW conductors: 0.0726 in.2 × 3 = 0.2178 in.2 Two 8 AWG THW conductors: 0.0437 in.2 × 3 = 0.0874 in.2 Total Area 0.3052 in.2 In NEC Chapter 9, Table 4, “Over 2 Wires—40%.” column size ¾ EMT holds up to 0.213 in.2 of conductor fill, and a trade size 1 EMT holds up to 0.346 in.2 of conductor fill. Therefore, a trade size 1 EMT is the minimum size for the combination of conductors in the example. POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Conductors of Different Sizes and/or Insulation Type QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:34 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:35 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_18_Lighting Branch Circuit, Receptacle Circuits for Workshop 16. NEC 310.15(C)(1) requires that the ampacity must be reduced when more than three current-carrying conductors are installed in a raceway or multiconductor cables are installed for a continuous length longer than ______ inches without maintaining spacing. a. 12 b. 18 c. 24 d. 36 ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Adjustment (Derating) Factors for More than Three Current-Carrying Conductors in Conduit or Cable QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:36 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:36 AM 17. When there are six current-carrying conductors in the conduit or cable and it is installed in a dry location, the correct ampacity for size 6 AWG THHN/THWN would be ________. Note that we can begin the derating from the ampacity in the 90°C column of Table 310.16 ANSWER: in a dry location because the THHN insulation has a 90°C rating of 75-amperes. Adjustment factors necessary to determine conductor ampacity when there are more than three current-carrying conductors in a raceway or cable. See 310.15(C)(1). 4 through 6 current carrying conductors Percent of values in Table 310.16 =80 75 X 80% = 60-amperes ampacity. POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Adjustment (Derating) Factors for More than Three Current-Carrying Conductors in Conduit or Cable QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:38 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:39 AM 18. When conductors are installed in locations where the ambient temperature is higher than ____ the correction factors noted in Table 310.15 (B)(1)(1) must be applied. a. 80°F b. 85°F c. 86°F d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Correction Factors Due to High Temperatures QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_18_Lighting Branch Circuit, Receptacle Circuits for Workshop HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:40 AM 19. The ampacity of four current-carrying 3 AWG THWN copper conductors that are to be installed in one raceway or cable in an ambient temperature of approximately 90°F (32°C) would be _______. The ampacity of a 3 AWG THWN copper conductors from Table 310.16 = 100 amperes. ANSWER: Apply the correction factor for 90°F (32°C) found in Table 310.15(B)(1)(1). The first column shows Celsius, the last column shows Fahrenheit. 100 × 0.94 = 94-amperes Apply the derating factor for four current-carrying conductors in one raceway. 94 × 0.80 = 75.2-amperes Therefore, 75.2-amperes is the new corrected ampacity for the example given. POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Correction Factors Due to High Temperatures QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:41 AM 20. Eight copper conductors with THHN/THWN insulation are installed in one raceway or cable(s). The conditions are dry and the temperature is expected to reach 100°F (38°C). All conductors are considered to be current-carrying. The expected noncontinuous load on each conductor is 18-amperes. Given this information the ampacity is ________. Load of 18-amperes when there are 8 current-carrying conductors in the conduit or cable. ANSWER: Table 310.15(C)(1) requires an adjustment factor of 70%. 18-amperes ÷ 0.7 = 25.7-amperes Next, we need to apply the correction factor for the 100°F ambient temperature. Table 310.15(B)(1)(1) indicates that for conductors that have an insulation suitable for 90°C we need to apply a 0.91 correction factor. 25.7-amperes ÷ 0.91 = 28.2-amperes Table 310.16 in the 90°C column, we find that a 12 AWG conductor with THHN insulation has an ampacity of 30 amperes and appears to be adequate for the load, however, note the asterisks in Table 310.16 next to the size of conductors 18 AWG through 10 AWG. A 12 AWG copper conductor is generally limited to being connected to a 20-ampere overcurrent protective device (Art. 240(D)(6)). So the minimum size conductor under these conditions is 10 AWG. POINTS: REFERENCES:

1 Example of Derating, Correcting, Adjusting, Overcurrent Protection, and Conductor Sizing QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:43 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_18_Lighting Branch Circuit, Receptacle Circuits for Workshop 21. NEC permits use of the next higher circuit breaker if the ampacity of the conductors does not match standard for conductors ________. a. 400-amperes or less b. 600-amperes or less c. 800-amperes or less d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Overcurrent Protection for Branch Circuit Conductors QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:44 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 7:07 AM 22. The permission in to use the next higher circuit breaker if the ampacity of the conductor does not apply if the conductors supply ______ receptacle(s) for cord-and-plug connection of a load. a. four or more b. three or more c. more than one d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Overcurrent Protection for Branch Circuit Conductors QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:47 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:47 AM 23. An overcurrent device is not permitted to be smaller than _____ of continuous loads plus ____ of noncontinuous loads on branch circuits. a. 100%, 125% b. 125%, 125% c. 125%, 100% d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Basic Code Consideration for Conductor Sizing and Overcurrent Protection QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:47 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:48 AM 24. In the sizing of branch circuit conductors for electric water heaters and electric space heating in dwellings, both are Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_18_Lighting Branch Circuit, Receptacle Circuits for Workshop not considered continuous loads but the conductors are required to not be smaller than _____ of the load. a. 110% b. 125% c. 130% d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Basic Code Consideration for Conductor Sizing and Overcurrent Protection QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:48 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:49 AM 25. One of the possible feeder ampacity limits is conductors are required to have an ampacity no less than the noncontinuous load plus _______ of the continuous load. a. 100% b. 125% c. 130% d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Basic Code Consideration for Conductor Sizing and Overcurrent Protection QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:49 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:51 AM 26. Prewired assemblies typically have _____ AWG THHN conductors. a. 14 b. 12 c. 10 d. 14 ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Wiring a Multioutlet Assembly QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:51 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:52 AM 27. Prewired assemblies are available with a number of various configurations. ____ receptacles 40 inches long, or ____ receptacles 52 inches long. a. Five, 10 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_18_Lighting Branch Circuit, Receptacle Circuits for Workshop b. Six, 12 c. Six, 10 d. Eight, 12 ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Wiring a Multioutlet Assembly QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:53 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:53 AM 28. The installation of different types of multioutlet assemblies can be on duplex, split-wired, or ____ receptacles. duplex split-wired ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Load Considerations for Multioutlet Assemblies QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:54 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:54 AM 29. A GFCI feed-through receptacle supplying the multioutlet strip provides ________ for the entire plug-in strip, NEC 210.8(A)(5). a. overcurrent protection b. GFCI protection c. AFFCI and GFCI protection d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Multioutlet THN Assembly QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:55 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:55 AM

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_19_Special-Purpose Outlets—Water Pump, Water Heater 1. Water pumps that contain all required starting and protection components and connect directly to the pressure switch with no above-ground controller, are often called _________ pumps. a. 2-wire b. 3-wire c. 4-wire d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Submersible Pumps QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:06 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:07 AM 2. A submersible pump cable is not designed for direct burial in the ground unless the single conductors are marked Type ______ or ________. a. XHHMC or XHHN b. USE or USE-2 c. THN or THHN d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Submersible Pump Cable QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:08 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:09 AM 3. The "jet pump" name comes from the _______which terminates in a small nozzle or “jet.” a. casing b. impeller c. drive pipe d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Jet Pumps QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:10 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 8:45 AM 4. Pumps, referred to as “3-wire pumps,” require an above ground controller that contains any required components not in the motor, such as a starting relay, overload protection, lightning arrester, terminals for making the necessary electrical connections, and __________. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_19_Special-Purpose Outlets—Water Pump, Water Heater starting and running capacitors ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Submersible Pumps QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:11 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 7:07 AM 5. Most water pressure tanks have a precharged ______ in an elastic bag (bladder) that separates the air from the water. a. water reservoir b. CO2 c. air chamber d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Submersible Pumps QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:12 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:13 AM 6. To help reduce the premature burnout of heating elements, some manufacturers will supply 250-volt heating elements, yet will mark the nameplate 240-volts, with its corresponding wattage at 240-volts. This allows a ________ if slightly higher than normal voltages are experienced. a. higher current b. lower temperature c. safety factor d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Heating Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:13 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:14 AM 7. Electric water heaters are equipped with a high-temperature cutoff. High-temperature water is limited to ________. a. 175°F b. 185°F c. 195°F d. 190°F ANSWER: d Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_19_Special-Purpose Outlets—Water Pump, Water Heater POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Water Heater Circuit QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:17 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:18 AM 8. Proper discharge piping must be installed from the pressure/temperature relief valve downward to within ________ of the floor, preferably near a floor drain. a. 4 inches b. 5 inches c. 6 inches d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Combination Pressure/Temperature Safety Relief Valves QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:18 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:19 AM 9. To reduce corrosion of the steel tank, most water heater tanks are______. a. made of stainless steel b. galvanized c. glass lined d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Corrosion of Tank QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:19 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:19 AM 10. Heating elements generally contain a ______ resistance wire embedded in compacted powdered magnesium oxide to ensure that no grounds occur between the wire and the sheath. a. nickel-chrome (nichrome) b. copper c. aluminum d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Heating Element Construction Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_19_Special-Purpose Outlets—Water Pump, Water Heater QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:20 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:20 AM 11. To ensure that the branch circuit has adequate capacity, NEC 422.13 requires that the water heater branch-circuit rating must not be less than _______ of the nameplate rating. a. 80% b. 90% c. 125% d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Branch-Circuit Rating QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:20 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 2:16 AM 12. A disconnect need not be _____ of motor and driven machinery if the disconnect can be individually locked in the open "OFF" position. a. within the room b. within 20 ft. c. in sight d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: How to Use the Exception to the “In-Sight” Rule QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:21 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:22 AM 13. The overload protection for a motor might be thermal overloads (sometimes called heaters) in the controller, electronic sensing overload devices, time-delay fuses, or _______ protection. built-in thermal protection ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Motor Overload Protection (430.31 through 430.44) QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:23 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:33 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_19_Special-Purpose Outlets—Water Pump, Water Heater 14. Normally, conductors other than service-entrance conductors are not permitted in the same raceway as the serviceentrance conductors, NEC 230.7. However, Exception No. 2 to this section does permit load management control conductors that have ______ protection to be installed in the service raceway. a. GFCI b. AFCI c. overcurrent d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Are Water Heater Control Conductors Permitted in the Same Raceway as ServiceEntrance Conductors? QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:24 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:25 AM 15. NEC 430.103 requires that a disconnecting means for a motor shall ____. a. open all ungrounded conductors b. open one grounded conductor c. be designed to close automatically d. be designed so all poles operate consecutively ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Disconnecting Means QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:25 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:26 AM 16. With respect to electric water heaters, air-conditioning, and heat pump loads, off-peak metering, also known as “time of use” or “time of day” metering, allows the utility to use a separate watt-hour meter/time clock and a set of _____ to control the circuit to the appliance. a. switches b. relays c. switching contacts d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Utility Controlled QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:26 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:27 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_19_Special-Purpose Outlets—Water Pump, Water Heater 17. When homeowners have a _______electric water heater, they will have an adequate supply of hot water when the power to the water heater is off. large-storage-capacity ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Various Types of Electrical Connections QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:27 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:34 AM 18. Electronic digital meters contain an optical assembly that ________ and a microprocessor that records the number of turns and speed of the disc. scans the rotating disc ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Utility Controlled QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:28 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:28 AM 19. The switching contacts in electronic digital meters are connected in series with the water heater, air conditioner, or _____ load that is to be controlled for the special “time-of-day” rates. heat pump ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Utility Controlled QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:29 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:29 AM 20. Electronic digital meters are available with either 30-ampere contacts or _______. 50-ampere contacts ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Utility Controlled QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:29 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:30 AM 21. A resistive element will only produce rated wattage at rated voltage. It will operate at a _____ wattage with a Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_19_Special-Purpose Outlets—Water Pump, Water Heater reduction in voltage. a. constant b. lower c. higher d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Effect of Voltage Variation on Resistive Heating Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:30 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:31 AM 22. If connected to voltages above their rating, heating elements will have increased current and have a ________life. a. longer b. shorter ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Effect of Voltage Variation on Resistive Heating Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:31 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:31 AM 23. Consider a 3000-watt, 240-volt heating element. Its resistance and current draw would be _______. ANSWER:

If a different voltage is substituted, the wattage and current values change accordingly. At 220 volts:

POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Effect of Voltage Variation on Resistive Heating Elements QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:32 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:35 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_19_Special-Purpose Outlets—Water Pump, Water Heater 24. In resistive circuits (assuming constant resistance), current is _____ to voltage and can be simply calculated for various voltages. a. directly proportional b. inversely proportional c. equal d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Effect of Voltage Variation on Resistive Heating Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:40 AM 25. NEMA rated electric motors are designed to operate at ± _____ of their nameplate voltage. Under or overvoltage will change full-load current and starting-current for typical electric motors. a. 5% b. 10% c. 15% d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Effect of Voltage Variation on Motors QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:41 AM 26. The function of the temperature portion of the pressure/temperature relief valve is to open when a temperature of ______ occurs within the water heater tank. a. 190°F b. 200°F c. 210°F d. 212°F ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Combination Pressure/Temperature Safety Relief Valves QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:43 AM 27. UL Standards require that electric water heaters be equipped with a high-temperature cutoff. This high-temperature Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_19_Special-Purpose Outlets—Water Pump, Water Heater control limits the maximum water temperature to _____. a. 175°F b. 190°F c. 200°F d. 210°F ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Water Heater Circuit QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:44 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:44 AM 28. Terminating the discharge pipe to within ______ of the floor is important to protect people from injury from scalding water or steam discharge should the relief valve activate for any reason. a. 4 in. b. 5 in. c. 6 in. d. 8 in. ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Combination Pressure/Temperature Safety Relief Valves QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:45 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:46 AM 29. When water is heated it _________. a. contracts b. expands c. steams d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Combination Pressure/Temperature Safety Relief Valves QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:47 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:47 AM 30. Should runaway water heating conditions occur within the water heater, temperatures far exceeding the atmospheric boiling point of water can take place. The boiling point of water is __________. a. 200°F Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_19_Special-Purpose Outlets—Water Pump, Water Heater b. 210°F c. 212°F d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Combination Pressure/Temperature Safety Relief Valves QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:47 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:48 AM 31. Residential heat pump water heaters can save ________over the energy consumption of resistance-type electric water heaters, depending on energy rates. a. about 10% b. about 20% c. 30-35% d. 50-60% ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Heat Pump Water Heaters QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:48 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:49 AM 32. Heat pump water heaters remove about _____ moisture from the air. a. 1 gallon b. one pint c. ½ pint d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Heat Pump Water Heaters QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:49 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 7:50 AM 33. A heat pump water heater removes low-grade heat from the surrounding air and transfers the heat to the water. The unit shuts off when the water reaches ______. a. 120°F b. 110°F c. 130°F Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_19_Special-Purpose Outlets—Water Pump, Water Heater d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Heat Pump Water Heaters QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:50 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:51 AM 34. The exhausted cool air from the heat pump water heater is about _______ below room temperature. a. 50-55°F b. 20-25°F c. 10-15°F d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Heat Pump Water Heaters QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:51 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 7:51 AM 35. Heat pump water heaters operate in conjunction with ______. normal resistance water heaters ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Heat Pump Water Heaters QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:52 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 7:08 AM

Page 11

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_20_Special-Purpose Outlets for Ranges, Counter-Mounted Cooking Unit, and Wall-Mounted Oven 1. NEC 422.60(A) requires that an appliance nameplate show the appliance rating in volts and amperes or in volts and ________. watts ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Nameplate on Appliance QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:07 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 5:08 AM 2. For appliances that have no marked maximum overcurrent protection, the branch-circuit overcurrent protection is sized at ____. a. the maximum amount possible b. the ampacity of the branch-circuit conductors supplying the appliance c. 30-amperes maximum d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Overcurrent Protection QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:09 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 5:09 AM 3. A feeder or service-neutral load can be figured at ____ of the load on the ungrounded conductors for ranges and ovens. a. 70% b. 80% c. 125% d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Load Calculations QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:10 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 5:10 AM 4. NEC 422.11(A) states that the branch-circuit overcurrent protection shall not _______ the rating marked on the appliance. exceed or surpass (either term is correct) ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Overcurrent Protection Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_20_Special-Purpose Outlets for Ranges, Counter-Mounted Cooking Unit, and Wall-Mounted Oven QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:11 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:38 AM 5. According to NEC Table 220.55, the demand is permitted to be figured at ____________for an electric range that is rated 12 kW or less. 8 kW ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Free-Standing Range – Load Calculations QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:11 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 5:12 AM 6. To calculate the overcurrent protection, conductors, and grounding needed for a countertop-cooking unit rated 7450 watts, 120/240 volt, the following would be done ________. To begin, calculate the load using nameplate rating per Table 220.55, NI = W/E = ANSWER: 7,450/240 = 31.04-amperes. Ampacity is determined using the 60°C column of Table 310.16. Here we find that an 8 AWG conductor has an ampacity of 40-amperes. The disconnecting means is the 40-ampere, 2-pole circuit breaker. A cord-and-plug connection would also be a disconnecting means. The equipment grounding conductor contained in the nonmetallic-sheathed cable provides the means for grounding the frame of the appliance, 10 AWG copper. POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Counter-Mounted Cooking Unit Circuit QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:12 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 5:13 AM 7. To calculate the overcurrent protection, conductors, and grounding needed for a double oven free-standing range rated 14,050 watts, 240 volts, the following would be done ______. To begin, calculate the load using nameplate rating per Table 220.55, I = W/E = 14050/240 ANSWER: = 58.5 amperes. However, Table 220.55 and the footnotes provide the information we need to make the load calculation. The column C load of 8 kW per 1 appliance is permitted to be used with 5% added for each kW or major fraction thereof by which the rating of the cooking appliances exceeds 12 kW. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_20_Special-Purpose Outlets for Ranges, Counter-Mounted Cooking Unit, and Wall-Mounted Oven 14,050 – 12,000 watts = 2050 watts (2 kW) increase over 12 kW base = 10% The calculated load is then 8 kW + 0.8 kW = 8.8 kW. In amperes, the calculated load is I = W/E = 8800/240 = 36.7-amperes. NEC 210.19(A)(3), Exception No. 2 states the neutral can be reduced to not less than 70% of the branch-circuit rating but never smaller than 10 AWG. 40 X 0.70 = 28-amperes. The Table 310.16 ampacity of 8 AWG conductors is 40 amps, adequate for the load. For this cable type, neutral is 10 AWG copper, ampacity of 30-amperes, again adequate. Overcurrent protection is provided by a 2-pole, 40-ampere circuit breaker. The disconnecting means would be the 2-pole, 40-ampere circuit breaker. A cord-and-plug connection behind the base of a freestanding electric range would also serve as a disconnecting means. The equipment grounding conductor contained in the nonmetallic-sheathed cable provides the means for grounding the frame of the appliance. POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Larger Ranges QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:13 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 2:32 AM 8. To calculate the overcurrent protection, conductors, and grounding needed for a single branch circuit supplying a 7.45 kW counter-mounted cooking unit and one 6.6 kW wall-mounted oven, all located in the same room, the following would be done _______. In amperes, the calculated load is I = W/E = 8800/240 = 36.7-amperes.The calculation is ANSWER: made by adding up the nameplate ratings of the individual appliances, then treating this total as if it were one electric range. The total connected load of these two appliances is 7450 + 6600 = 14050 watts I = W/E = 14050/240 = 58.5 amperes. However, Table 220.55 and the footnotes provide the information we need to make the load calculation. The column C load of 8 kW per 1 appliance is permitted to be used with 5% added for each kW or major fraction thereof by which the rating of the cooking appliances exceeds 12 kW. 14,050 – 12,000 watts = 2050 watts (2 kW) increase over 12 kW base = 10% The calculated load is then 8 kW + 0.8 kW = 8.8 kW. In amperes, the calculated load is I = W/E = 8800/240 = 36.7-amperes. NEC 210.19(A)(3), Exception No. 2 states the neutral can be reduced to not less than 70% of the branch-circuit rating but never smaller than 10 AWG. 40 X 0.70 = 28-amperes. The Table 310.16 ampacity of 8 AWG conductors is 40 amps, adequate for the load. For this cable type, neutral is 10 AWG copper, ampacity of 30-amperes, again adequate. Overcurrent protection is provided by a 2-pole, 40-ampere circuit breaker. The disconnecting means would be the 2-pole, 40-ampere circuit breaker. A cord-and-plug connection behind the base of a freestanding electric range would also serve as a disconnecting means. The equipment grounding conductor contained in the nonmetallic-sheathed cable provides Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_20_Special-Purpose Outlets for Ranges, Counter-Mounted Cooking Unit, and Wall-Mounted Oven the means for grounding the frame of the appliance. POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Calculations when More than One Wall-Mounted Oven and Counter-Mounted Cooking Unit Are Supplied by One Branch Circuit QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:18 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:38 AM 9. Describe the overcurrent protection, conductors, and grounding calculations for a wall-mounted oven alone rated 6.6 kW (6600 Watts) at 120/240 volts. To begin, determine load required. I = W/E = 6600/240 = 27.5 amperes ANSWER: In 310.16, use the 60°C column to find that a 10 AWG conductor has an ampacity of 30amperes. This will be a 10 AWG 3-conductor plus equipment grounding conductor nonmetallic-sheathed cable. A 2-pole, 30-ampere circuit breaker located in Panelboard B provides the overcurrent protection. The disconnecting means is the 30-ampere, 2-pole circuit breaker. If a cord-and-plug connection were made, this also would serve as a disconnecting means. The equipment grounding conductor contained in the nonmetallic-sheathed cable (110 AWG) provides the means for grounding the frame of the oven. POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Wall-Mounted Oven Circuit QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:19 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 3:20 AM 10. To calculate the overcurrent protection, conductors, and grounding needed for a countertop-cooking unit rated 7,450 watts, 120/240 volts, the following would be done _________. To begin, calculate the load using nameplate rating per Table 220.55, I = W/E = 7,450/240 ANSWER: = 31.04-amperes. 8 AWG conductor has an ampacity of 40-amperes—more than adequate for the appliance’s calculated load of 31-amperes. This will be an 8 AWG 3-conductor plus equipment grounding conductor nonmetallic-sheathed cable. This result shows that overcurrent protection requires use of a 40-ampere, two-pole circuit breaker. The disconnecting means is the 40-ampere, 2-pole circuit breaker. The equipment grounding conductor contained in the nonmetallic-sheathed cable provides the means for grounding the frame of the appliance. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_20_Special-Purpose Outlets for Ranges, Counter-Mounted Cooking Unit, and Wall-Mounted Oven POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Counter-Mounted Cooking Unit Circuit QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:20 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 3:29 AM 11. A NEMA receptacle and plug rated 125/250 volt, 30-ampere, 3-wire has a(n) ________ shaped neutral blade. a. Round b. Straight c. L d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Blade and Slot Configuration for Plug Caps and Receptacles QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:21 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 5:22 AM 12. A NEMA receptacle and plug rated 125/250-v, 30-ampere, 4-wire still has the L-shaped neutral plus _______ for the equipment ground. horseshoe-shaped slot (receptacle) or round blade (plug) ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Blade and Slot Configuration for Plug Caps and Receptacles QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:23 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:40 AM 13. Describe the configuration of the neutral connection in a NEMA receptacle and plug rated 125/250-volt, 50 ampere, 3wire _______. wide flat blade for the plug, matching wide flat slot on the receptacle ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Blade and Slot Configuration for Plug Caps and Receptacles QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:26 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 7:52 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_20_Special-Purpose Outlets for Ranges, Counter-Mounted Cooking Unit, and Wall-Mounted Oven 14. A NEMA receptacle and plug rated 125/250-volt, 50-ampere, 4-wire would be described as ______. a flat blade neutral and horseshoe or round shape for equipment ground ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Blade and Slot Configuration for Plug Caps and Receptacles QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:27 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 5:28 AM 15. Receptacle and cord terminals are marked “W” for the white grounded conductor, “G” for the equipment grounding conductor, and __________ for the ungrounded conductors. "X" and "Y" ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Terminal Identification for Receptacles and Cords QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:33 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 5:34 AM 16. Most electric ranges are equipped with infinite-position temperature controls. These controls contain electrical contacts that open and close constantly, _______ the power supply to the heating element, thus maintaining the desired temperature of the surface heating unit. a. intermittently attaching b. pulsing c. solidly connecting d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Infinite-Position Controls QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:35 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 5:37 AM 17. Fixed-heat controls are rotary controls that have specific “_______” that lock the switch contacts into place as the knob is rotated to the various heat positions. a. places b. indents c. clock positions d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_20_Special-Purpose Outlets for Ranges, Counter-Mounted Cooking Unit, and Wall-Mounted Oven REFERENCES: Fixed-Heat Controls QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:38 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 5:40 AM 18. Coil size selector controls are used with 3-coil heating elements. In position one, the center only heating element comes on. In position two, the center and middle heating elements come on. In the third position, the _______ heating elements come on. The fourth position is OFF. center, middle, and outer ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Coil Size Selector Controls QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:56 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:41 AM 19. Fixed-heat controls switch heat elements in series, in parallel, or _____. in series/parallel ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Fixed-Heat Controls QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:57 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 5:58 AM 20. In this country, we use the term ground, grounded, and grounding. In Europe and other countries as well, the terms related to this subject are _________. a. ground b. soil c. earth and earthed d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Connecting Foreign-Made Appliances QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:58 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 5:59 AM 21. In the U.S. we use green color for ground terminals. In Europe and other countries instructions might indicate green, green/yellow, or _________. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_20_Special-Purpose Outlets for Ranges, Counter-Mounted Cooking Unit, and Wall-Mounted Oven bare ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Connecting Foreign-Made Appliances QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:59 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 6:00 AM 22. Neutrals (grounded conductors) are generally colored ________ in Europe. a. red b. yellow c. blue d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Connecting Foreign-Made Appliances QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 6:00 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 6:01 AM 23. In the U.S., we use black and red for the ungrounded “hot” conductor. In Europe, live conductors are colored __________. a. red b. brown c. orange d. black ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Connecting Foreign-Made Appliances QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 6:01 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 3:42 AM 24. In Europe, the equipment grounding terminal might be marked with the letter ______. a. “G” b. “E” c. “S” d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_20_Special-Purpose Outlets for Ranges, Counter-Mounted Cooking Unit, and Wall-Mounted Oven REFERENCES: Connecting Foreign-Made Appliances QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 6:02 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 6:02 AM

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_21_Special-Purpose Outlets—Food Waste Disposer, Dishwasher 1. Typically, the single-pole wall switch that controls a continuous feed food waste disposer is located _______. a. under the sink b. above the countertop c. on the disposer d. below the countertop ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Controls QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:02 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:02 AM 2. After shutting off the disposer to flush the drain clear of food waste particles, water should be left running for ________. a. 5 seconds b. 10 seconds c. 15 seconds d. 20 seconds ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Controls QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:03 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:03 AM 3. The food waste disposer or dishwasher should not be connected to any of the required ___________ circuits in the kitchen. a. 15-ampere lighting b. 20-ampere convenience c. 20-ampere small-appliance branch d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Branch-Circuit Rating QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:03 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:04 AM 4. The best way to connect waste disposers and dishwashers is to supply each appliance with a separate ________ circuit. a. 15-ampere feeder Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_21_Special-Purpose Outlets—Food Waste Disposer, Dishwasher b. 20-ampere branch c. 20-ampere feeder d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Branch-Circuit Rating QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:04 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:05 AM 5. Dishwasher outlets installed in residential kitchens are required to have _____ protection, per NEC 210.12(A) a. AFCI b. GFCI c. AFCI and GFCI ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Operation of the Heat/Vent/Light QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:05 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:05 AM 6. “Batch-feed” food waste disposers start and stop the disposer when the user _______ after filling the disposer with waste food. a. snaps the on-off switch into place b. plugs the device into a receptacle c. twists the drain cover into place d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Controls QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:06 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:06 AM 7. Batch-feed waste disposers need ______ for control. a. a wall switch b. an adequate receptacle c. only an integral drain cover switch d. all of the above ANSWER: c Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_21_Special-Purpose Outlets—Food Waste Disposer, Dishwasher POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Controls QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:06 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:07 AM 8. Note that NEC 210.12(B) requires 120-volt circuits that supply waste disposer outlets or devices in dwelling unit kitchens to have ______. a. GFCI protection as applicable b. AFCI protection c. AFCI and GFCI protection as applicable ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: GFCI and AFCI Protection QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:07 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:08 AM 9. Continuous feed food waste disposers are ________conveniently located above the countertop. a. permitted to be connected to the small appliance circuits b. usually controlled by a single-pole wall switch c. connected to a 15-ampere individual outlet d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Controls QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:08 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:08 AM 10. The two general methods of connecting food-waste disposers are hard-wired and cord-and-plug connected to ____________________. a. a general purpose branch circuit b. an individual branch circuit c. a kitchen lighting circuit d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Branch-Circuit Rating QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_21_Special-Purpose Outlets—Food Waste Disposer, Dishwasher HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:09 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:09 AM 11. Cord-and plug connected dishwashers can have a cord length no shorter than 3 ft (0.9 m) and no longer than _______. a. 5 ft b. 7 ft c. 10 ft d. 6.5 ft ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Cord-and-Plug Connection QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:09 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:10 AM 12. If a 3-wire cord-and-plug connection is desired for easy disconnecting and servicing, the appliances would ________as being intended or identified for flexible cord connection. a. have to be listed by the manufacturer b. not have to be listed c. have to be listed by an Electrical Products Testing Lab d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Cord-and-Plug Connection QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:10 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:11 AM 13. A duplex grounding-type receptacle under the kitchen sink covered by a moveable door is __________ and required to _______. a. considered to be accessible, be GFCI protected b. not accessible, be GFCI protected (subject to AHJ interpretation) ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Cord-and-Plug Connection QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:11 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:12 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_21_Special-Purpose Outlets—Food Waste Disposer, Dishwasher 14. Cord lengths for a food waste disposer are no shorter than 18 in. (450 mm) and no longer than ______ as per NEC. a. 3 ft b. 5 ft c. 10 ft d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Cord-and-Plug Connection QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:12 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:12 AM 15. Overload protection prevents the motor from _____. a. burning out b. speeding up c. slowing down d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Overload Protection QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:13 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:13 AM 16. Branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protection is provided by the branch-circuit _______, sized according to the manufacturers’ recommendations. a. fuse or circuit breaker b. receptacle c. wire size d. attachment plug ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Branch-Circuit Protection QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:13 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:14 AM 17. The circuit breaker in the panelboard can both protect the circuit from overload and serve as the disconnecting means if it is _____. a. within sight Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_21_Special-Purpose Outlets—Food Waste Disposer, Dishwasher b. capable of being locked off c. either within sight or capable of being locked off d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Disconnecting Means QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:14 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:15 AM 18. A receptacle under a sink would require _____. a. an AFCI b. an AFCI and a GFCI c. a GFCI only ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: GFCI and AFCI Protection QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:15 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:15 AM 19. Time-delay fuses sized at approximately ______ of the full-load current rating of the motor adds extra overcurrent protection to the overload protection built into a food-waste disposer. a. 85% b. 100% c. 125% d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Supplemental Overcurrent Protection and Disconnecting Means QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:16 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:16 AM 20. Box-cover units provide overload protection and ______. They also serve as a convenient accessible disconnecting means. short circuit protection ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Supplemental Overcurrent Protection and Disconnecting Means QUESTION TYPE: Essay Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_21_Special-Purpose Outlets—Food Waste Disposer, Dishwasher HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:16 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:19 AM 21. Switch/fuse box-cover units can assure the dishwasher is off and serve as the ______. disconnecting means ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Supplemental Overcurrent Protection and Disconnecting Means QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:18 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:18 AM 22. A wall switch, circuit breaker or _____ can serve as the disconnecting means. cord and plug ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Disconnecting Means QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:17 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:17 AM 23. Some local codes require that these appliances be _______so the appliances can easily be disconnected. a. hard-wired b. cord-and-plug connected c. lockable d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Disconnecting Means QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:19 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:20 AM 24. The equipment grounding conductors permitted include Type MC cable, or flexible metal conduit, or _____ under specific conditions. nonmetallic-sheathed cable ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Grounding Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_21_Special-Purpose Outlets—Food Waste Disposer, Dishwasher QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:20 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:21 AM 25. The equipment grounding conductor is required to be bare or have green insulation, or _________. green insulation with one or more yellow stripes ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Grounding QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:21 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:21 AM 26. The equipment grounding conductor terminal in a receptacle is required to be bare or green and ______ shaped. a. round b. square c. hexagon d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Grounding QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:22 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:23 AM 27. Appliances can be grounded to the _______circuit conductor. a. grounding b. nearest water pipe c. nearest outlet d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Grounding QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:23 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:24 AM 28. Some manufacturers of dishwashers provide a feature that turns on the heating element for the final rinse cycle. This Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_21_Special-Purpose Outlets—Food Waste Disposer, Dishwasher raises the water temperature from ______to the desired 140°F (60°C)–145°F (63°C). a. 100°F b. 120°F c. 130°F d. 135°F ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Water Temperature QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:24 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:24 AM 29. Many municipalities and states have implemented code requirements that water heater thermostats be set at not over _____which is not hot enough to properly clean dishes and glasses. a. 100°F b. 110°F c. 120°F d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Water Temperature QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:25 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:25 AM

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_22_Special-Purpose Outlets for the Bathroom Ceiling Heat_Vent_Lights, the Attic Fan, and the Hydromassage Tub 1. The heat/vent/light is controlled by four switches. In addition to the night light (if included), there is one switch for the heater, one switch for the light, and one switch for the __________. exhaust fan ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Operation of the Heat/Vent/Light QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:44 AM 2. A fixture needs five wires. Among them are one conductor each for the fan, one for the night light, one conductor each for the heating element, and _________. one common white-grounded conductor ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Wiring QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:44 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:45 AM 3. Nontrained electricians often violate the Code by running one 3-wire and one 2-wire cable between the wall box and heat/vent/light. To meet Code all conductors of the same circuit must be included as well as the _____. the grounding conductors ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Wiring QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:45 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:45 AM 4. Exhaust fans and luminaires are available with integral automatic moisture sensors and/or _____. occupancy sensors ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Operation of the Heat/Vent/Light QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:46 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:46 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_22_Special-Purpose Outlets for the Bathroom Ceiling Heat_Vent_Lights, the Attic Fan, and the Hydromassage Tub 5. The heat/vent/light must be properly grounded. The equipment grounding conductor may not be connected to ______. a. the equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic-sheathed cable b. the armor or bonding wire in Type MC cable c. the grounded neutral conductor d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Grounding the Heat/Vent/Light QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:46 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:47 AM 6. Overload protection prevents an exhaust fan motor from burning out if it ____ for any reason. stalls ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Overload Protection (NEC 430.31 through 430.44) QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:47 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:48 AM 7. An exhaust fan can lower the indoor temperature of the house as much as______. a. 30ºF to 35ºF b. 10ºF to 20ºF c. 5ºF to 10ºF d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Attic Exhaust Fan Branch Circuit QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:48 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:49 AM 8. On hot days, the air in an attic can reach superheated temperatures of more than ______. a. 200ºF b. 180ºF c. 150ºF d. all of the above ANSWER: c Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_22_Special-Purpose Outlets for the Bathroom Ceiling Heat_Vent_Lights, the Attic Fan, and the Hydromassage Tub POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Attic Exhaust Fan Branch Circuit QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:49 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:50 AM 9. Exhaust fan ventilating capability is rated in cubic feet of air per minute (CFM). To determine the minimum amount of CFM needed, multiply the square footage of the house by _______. a. 2 b. 3 c. 5 d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Sizing a Home-Type Exhaust Fan QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:50 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:52 AM 10. Bathroom exhaust fans, vents for clothes dryers, and _____are not to be vented directly into the attic or other dead spaces. They are to be vented to the outside. similar high-humidity sources ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Attic Exhaust Fan Branch Circuit QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:52 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:53 AM 11. Well-insulated homes can experience problems with excess humidity due to the “____________________” of the house. tightness ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Humidity QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:53 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:53 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_22_Special-Purpose Outlets for the Bathroom Ceiling Heat_Vent_Lights, the Attic Fan, and the Hydromassage Tub 12. High humidity is uncomfortable, but a bigger problem is that high humidity promotes ________. a. growth of mold b. deterioration of fabrics c. deterioration of framing members, plaster, and drywall d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Humidity QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:54 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:54 AM 13. Instead of manual ON–OFF control of an exhaust fan, a desired humidity level can be maintained automatically with a device called a ___________. a. thermostat b. humidistat c. rheostat d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Humidity QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:55 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 11:56 AM 14. Adjustable settings are from 5% to 95% relative humidity. A comfort level of about ____________ relative humidity is considered acceptable. a. 30% b. 50% c. 70% d. 75% ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Humidity QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 11:59 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 12:00 PM 15. A dual-element, time-delay fuse sized at approximately _____ of the motor’s full-load current rating can serve for motor overload backup protection. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_22_Special-Purpose Outlets for the Bathroom Ceiling Heat_Vent_Lights, the Attic Fan, and the Hydromassage Tub a. 110% b. 120% c. 125% d. 130% ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Humidity QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 12:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 12:02 PM 16. NEC Article 100 defines a hydromassage bathtub as a permanently installed bathtub equipped with a recirculating piping system and _____. pump ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Hydromassage Bathtub Circuit QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 12:02 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 12:03 PM 17. If allowed by the manufacturer, a hydromassage bathtub may be supplied by a dedicated branch circuit rated 15ampere and 120-volts. If unsure what the actual draw is, run a branch circuit of _______ conductors. a. 14 AWG b. 10 AWG c. 12 AWG d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Electrical Connections QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 12:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 12:04 PM 18. All 125-volt receptacles rated 30-amperes and lower are also required to have GFCI protection if the hydromassage bathtub is within ______ . a. 3 ft b. 5 ft c. 6 ft Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_22_Special-Purpose Outlets for the Bathroom Ceiling Heat_Vent_Lights, the Attic Fan, and the Hydromassage Tub d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Electrical Connections QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 12:04 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 12:09 PM 19. For servicing purposes, certain connections or devices should or must be accessible at a hydromassage tub, including the junction box, the pump, and the __________. power panel ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Electrical Connections QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 12:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 12:10 PM

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_23_Special-Purpose Outlets—Electric Heating, Air Conditioning 1. When making a standard calculation for sizing a service or feeder, the percentage of the total connected fixed electric space-heating load that should be included would be ________. a. 150 % b. 125 % c. 100 % d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Summary of Important NEC Rules for Fixed Electric Space Heating Equipment QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 12:16 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 12:17 PM 2. The branch-circuit conductors supplying fixed electric space-heating equipment consisting of resistance elements is required to be no less than ____ of the total load of the motors and the heaters. a. 150% b. 125% c. 100% d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Summary of Important NEC Rules for Fixed Electric Space Heating Equipment QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 12:17 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 12:18 PM 3. Fixed electric space-heating equipment that requires supply conductors with over _______ insulation is required to be clearly and permanently marked. a. 50°C b. 70°F c. 60°C d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Summary of Important NEC Rules for Fixed Electric Space Heating Equipment QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 12:18 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 12:19 PM 4. A disconnecting means is required that will simultaneously disconnect the heater, motor controller(s), and supplementary ________ protective device(s), if the equipment has these, of all fixed electric space-heating equipment Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_23_Special-Purpose Outlets—Electric Heating, Air Conditioning from all ungrounded conductors. overcurrent ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Summary of Important NEC Rules for Fixed Electric Space Heating Equipment QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 12:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 12:19 PM 5. Equipment that is rated more than _______ amperes and employing resistance elements is required to have the heating elements subdivided, and each subdivided load is not permitted to exceed ________ amperes. a. 50, 32 b. 60, 48 c. 48, 32 d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Summary of Important NEC Rules for Fixed Electric Space Heating Equipment QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 12:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 12:20 PM 6. Because proper supply voltage is critical to ensure full output of the furnace’s heating elements, voltage must be maintained at no less than _____ of the furnace’s rated voltage. a. 85% b. 90% c. 95% d. 98% ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Supply Voltage QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 12:20 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 12:21 PM 7. For every 1% drop in voltage, there will be a ____% drop in wattage output of a resistance heating element. a. 5% b. 3% c. 2% d. 1% Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_23_Special-Purpose Outlets—Electric Heating, Air Conditioning ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Supply Voltage QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 12:22 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 12:22 PM 8. A simple way to calculate the effect of voltage variance on a resistive heating element is

or to apply Ohm's Law to both supply and rated voltage which would be ________. a. W = where W=watts E=voltage R=resistance b. W = E X R c. W = R / E ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Supply Voltage QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 12:23 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 12:27 PM 9. The rating of the heating elements in an electric furnace is 30 kW at 240-volts. The kW output if the supply voltage is 208-volts would be _______. The heating element output is _______ of it’s rating. a. 50%; 15 kW b. 75%; 22.5 kW c. 80%; 24 kW d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Supply Voltage QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 12:28 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 12:28 PM 10. If a 240 volt furnace rated 15 watts were supplied 208 volts, the output would be _____. a. 10.3 watts b. 11.3 watts c. 12.3 watts d. all of the above Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_23_Special-Purpose Outlets—Electric Heating, Air Conditioning ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Supply Voltage QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 12:28 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 12:29 PM 11. Hermetic refrigeration compressors have unique characteristics, including the following. The motor and compressor are combined into one unit, there is no external shaft, they do not have standard horsepower and full-load current ratings, and they _______. operate in the refrigerant ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Understanding the Data Found on an HVAC Nameplate QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 12:30 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 12:31 PM 12. The Branch Circuit Selection Current (BCSC) (sometimes called Minimum Circuit Ampacity) consists of the compressor load, (times _______) , plus the load of other equipment, including the evaporator fan. a. 110% b. 115% c. 125% d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Branch-Circuit Selection Current (BCSC) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 12:31 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 12:31 PM 13. If the Branch Circuit Selection Current (BCSA) is marked as 25.4-amperes, the minimum conductor size is _________. a. 12 AWG copper b. 10 AWG copper c. 8 AWG copper d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Minimum Circuit Ampacity (MCA) Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_23_Special-Purpose Outlets—Electric Heating, Air Conditioning QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 12:32 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 12:32 PM 14. Maximum Overcurrent Protection (MOP) value is marked on the nameplate and is determined by the manufacturer of the end-use equipment as Rated Load Current (RLC) times ____ plus other loads. a. 100% b. 150% c. 225% d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Maximum Overcurrent Protection (MOP) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 12:32 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 12:33 PM 15. HACR (heating, air conditioning, and refrigeration) equipment nameplate might indicate _________. a. maximum size fuse b. maximum size fuse or circuit breaker c. maximum size fuse or HACR circuit breaker d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Type of Overcurrent Protection QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 12:33 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 12:34 PM 16. For servicing HVAC equipment, NEC 210.63(A) requires that a 125-volt, single-phase, 15- or 20-ampere-rated receptacle be installed ________. a. at an accessible location b. on the same level as the HVAC equipment c. but shall not be connected to the load side of the equipment disconnecting means d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Receptacle Needed for Servicing HVAC Equipment QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_23_Special-Purpose Outlets—Electric Heating, Air Conditioning DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 12:34 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 12:35 PM 17. A receptacle must be installed to service HVAC equipment if the equipment is located on a roof, in an attic, or in ________. a similar location ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Receptacle Needed for Servicing HVAC Equipment QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 12:35 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 12:35 PM 18. If the equipment served is an evaporative cooler in one- and two-family dwellings a receptacle __________. a. is required b. is not required c. requirement is subject to interpretation d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Receptacle Needed for Servicing HVAC Equipment QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 12:35 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 12:36 PM 19. Ambient temperature correction factors might have to be applied if branch circuit conductors are installed outside where the ambient temperature exceeds ______. a. 80°F b. 86°F c. 90°F d. 95°F ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Receptacle Needed for Servicing HVAC Equipment QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 12:36 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 12:37 PM 20. The GFCI receptacle to an AC unit must be supplied if not integral to the unit. Problems or difficulties may result from __________. nuisance tripping of the air conditioner ANSWER: Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_23_Special-Purpose Outlets—Electric Heating, Air Conditioning POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Receptacle Needed for Servicing HVAC Equipment QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 12:37 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 12:37 PM 21. The Energy Efficiency Rating (EER) is: _______. BTU per hour divided by kilowatt-hours ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Energy Ratings QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 12:37 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 12:38 PM 22. The Seasonal Energy Efficiency Rating (SEER) would be explained as _______. a. only applying to heating equipment b. Btu during the cooling period divided by the total kilowatt-hours during the same period. c. the lower the SEER number, the better d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Energy Ratings QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 12:38 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 12:39 PM 23. Loads such as heating and air conditioning are not likely to operate at the same time. When calculating a feeder that supplies both types of loads, only the ______ is considered. a. smaller b. larger c. sum of each d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Noncoincident Loads QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 12:39 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_23_Special-Purpose Outlets—Electric Heating, Air Conditioning DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 12:39 PM 24. An AFUE of 85% means that _____ of the fuel is used to heat your home. a. less than 85% b. 85% c. more than 85% ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Energy Ratings QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 12:40 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 12:40 PM 25. HSPF is determined by _________. a. BTU divided by kWh during heating period b. BTU divided by kWh during cooling period c. BTU divided by kWh averaged for the entire year d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Energy Ratings QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/29/2023 12:40 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/29/2023 12:41 PM

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_24_Gas and Oil Central Heating Systems 1. Forced-warm air systems move hot air from the furnace through ______ that connect to registers strategically located throughout the home. a. radiation dampers b. supply ducts c. convection radiators d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Forced-Warm Air Furnaces QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 6:10 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 7:53 AM 2. A hydronic system is a system of heating or cooling that involves the transfer of heat by circulating fluid such as water in a closed system of ______. a. ducts b. registers c. radiators d. pipes ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Hot Water Systems QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 6:11 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 6:12 AM 3. Hot water systems are very adaptable to zone control by using a combination of one or more circulating pumps and/or _______ for the different zones. valves ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Hot Water Systems QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 6:12 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:44 AM 4. Most residential heating systems are packaged units which may include _________. a. safety controls b. valves c. temperature-limit switches Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_24_Gas and Oil Central Heating Systems d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Principle of Operation QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 6:13 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 6:13 AM 5. The “field wiring” for a typical residential furnace or boiler consists of __________. a. installing and connecting the low-voltage wiring between the furnace and the thermostat b. installing and connecting the branch-circuit power supply to the furnace c. installing or insuring there is a disconnecting means within sight d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Wiring a Residential Central Heating System QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 6:14 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 6:14 AM 6. With respect to disconnect switches, "within sight" means being visible and not more than ____ from the disconnect controls. a. 25 ft b. 50 ft c. 75 ft d. 100 ft ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Disconnecting Means QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 6:14 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 6:15 AM 7. NEC 422.12 mandates that central heating equipment, other than fixed electric space heaters, ____. a. have a disconnect mounted within sight of the unit b. be supplied by any individual branch circuit c. be wired by an electrician d. be prewired as part of a packaged unit ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_24_Gas and Oil Central Heating Systems REFERENCES: Disconnecting Means QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 6:15 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 6:16 AM 8. Class 2 conductors are generally made of ____, and have a thermoplastic insulation. a. nickel b. cadmium c. nonmetallic sheathed cable d. copper ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Individual Branch Circuit Required QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 6:16 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 6:17 AM 9. Listed Class 2 transformers are permitted to be supplied by branch circuits having overcurrent protection not exceeding ____ amperes. a. 15 b. 20 c. 30 d. 25 ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Wiring for Class 2 Circuits QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 6:17 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 6:17 AM 10. The branch-circuit rating for an appliance that is a continuous load usually requires a rating of no less than 125 percent of the marked rating. Typically, this rule _____ to branch circuits for gas- or oil-fired furnaces. a. also applies b. does not apply c. does apply but only 100% rating is needed d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Individual Branch Circuit Required QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_24_Gas and Oil Central Heating Systems HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 6:18 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 3:47 AM 11. Major parts of a heating system include the ________. a. fan motor b. flue c. control circuit d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Major Components QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 6:19 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 6:20 AM 12. The High-Temperature Limit Control primarily _______. is a safety device ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: High-Temperature Limit Control QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 6:20 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 6:21 AM 13. A switching relay has the following characteristics _______. a. used between the low-voltage and line-voltage wiring b. pulls in when heat is called for c. may have a built-in transformer d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Switching Relay QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 6:23 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 6:24 AM 14. A thermocouple consists of two dissimilar metals, such as ________. MULTIPLE ANSWERS ARE POSSIBLE ANY ANSWER BELOW IS CORRECT ANSWER: Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_24_Gas and Oil Central Heating Systems POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Thermocouple QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 6:24 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 6:25 AM 15. Class 2 power-limited circuits most common in residential use are covered in the NEC _______. a. Article 722 b. Article 702 c. Article 705 d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Class 2 Circuits QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 6:25 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:45 AM 16. Class 2 circuits are used in residences because they ________. a. are very tolerant b. offer alternative wiring methods c. typically require low-voltage conductors and cables d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Class 2 Circuits QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 6:29 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 6:30 AM 17. Class 2 wiring typically _________. a. are made of copper b. has thermoplastic insulation c. has a voltage rating of not less than 150 volts d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Class 2 Circuits QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_24_Gas and Oil Central Heating Systems HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 6:30 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 6:31 AM 18. Class 2 wiring does not have to be in a raceway, does not require separate overcurrent protection, and is ________. power-limited ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Class 2 Circuits QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 6:32 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 6:32 AM 19. Class 2 wiring may be attached to structural components by straps, staples, hangers, secured directly to surfaces with insulated staples, and used in _______. raceway ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Class 2 Circuits QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 6:33 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 6:34 AM

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_25_Television, Telephone, and Low-Voltage Signal Systems 1. Shielded 75-ohm RG-6 coaxial cable is most often used to hook up television sets to minimize interference and keep the color signal strong. The double-shielded cable that has a ______ foil shield covered with a 40% or greater woven braid is recommended. a. 50% b. 60% c. 75% d. 100% ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Installing the Wiring for Home Television QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 7:10 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 7:13 AM 2. Which rule is applied to coaxial cable installations under Article 820? a. The outer shield of the coaxial cable must be grounded. b. Coaxial cables shall not be run in the same conduits or box with electric light and power conductors. c. Do not support coaxial cables from raceways that contain electrical light and power conductors. d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Code Rules for Cable Television (CATV) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 7:13 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 3:50 AM 3. The combination unit that provides the compartment for the utility with controlled access and an owner’s compartment is known as a ____. a. network interface b. bonding conductor c. loop d. terminal bar ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Communications Wiring (Article 805) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 7:14 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 7:16 AM 4. An intersystem bonding termination is required to be installed at or near the service equipment, and at or near the building disconnecting means if remote buildings are supplied with electric power. The intersystem bonding termination Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_25_Television, Telephone, and Low-Voltage Signal Systems must _______. a. be accessible b. have sufficient capacity at terminals c. not interfere with openings d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Intersystem Bonding Termination QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 7:16 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:48 AM 5. Regardless of the type of antenna used, the line of sight from the antenna to the satellite must not be obstructed by _______. a. trees b. buildings c. utility poles d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Satellite Antennas QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 7:17 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:48 AM 6. Before installing an antenna, it is important to check with the local inspection department. In addition to the NEC, local codes might have local laws or restrictions and community _________. covenants ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Satellite Antennas QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 7:20 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 7:20 AM 7. The basic operation of a satellite system is for a transmitter on Earth to beam an “uplink” signal to a satellite in space. Electronic devices on the satellite reamplify and convert this signal to a _________. downlink signal ANSWER: POINTS: 1 QUESTION TYPE: Essay Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_25_Television, Telephone, and Low-Voltage Signal Systems HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 7:21 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 7:21 AM 8. The orbit in which satellites travel is called the "_________.” a. satellite belt b. orbital belt c. Clarke Belt d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Satellite Antennas QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 7:21 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 4:19 AM 9. A digital system allows the use of small antennas, approximately 18 in. (450 mm) in diameter, which through the use of proper mounting hardware can easily be mounted on a pipe, pedestal, or on the ________. a. roof b. chimney c. side of the house d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Satellite Antennas QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 7:22 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 7:23 AM 10. Chime transformers are covered under UL Standard 1585. Because of their low-voltage rating and power limitation, they are listed as Class 2 transformers. Class 2 circuits are discussed in Chapter 24, Article _______. a. 700 b. 701 c. 720 d. 725 ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Chime Transformers QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_25_Television, Telephone, and Low-Voltage Signal Systems DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 7:23 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 4:22 AM 11. Chime transformers used in dwellings are generally rated at _________. a. 10 volts b. 8 volts c. 16 or 24 volts d. 25 to 30 volts ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Chime Transformers QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 7:25 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 7:26 AM 12. Typical chime power consumption is about _____ watts. a. 5 b. 10 c. 15 d. 20 ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Additional Chimes QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 7:26 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 7:27 AM 13. When more than one chime is installed, it will probably be necessary to install a transformer with a higher volt-ampere (wattage) rating. Do not install a transformer with a _______. a. higher voltage rating b. higher current rating c. lower voltage but higher current rating d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Additional Chimes QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 7:27 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:49 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_25_Television, Telephone, and Low-Voltage Signal Systems 14. Some chimes come with a bare copper wire for equipment ground. Metal parts of the transformer must be grounded. Internally, this wire connects to _______. a. internal winding b. a metal frame c. terminals d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Chime Transformers QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 7:29 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:50 AM

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_26_Smoke, Heat, Carbon Monoxide Alarms, and Security Systems 1. Each year (for 2017-19) the U.S. Fire Administration says in 1 or 2 family buildings in the U.S., there were _______ fires. a. 100,000 b. 200,000 c. over 230,500 d. 400,000 ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code (NFPA 72) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 7:38 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 7:39 AM 2. The National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code sets the requirements for the proper selection, installation, operation, and maintenance of fire warning equipment that will provide reasonable fire and life safety. These are considered ________ requirements. a. standard b. minimum c. suggested d. worst case ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code (NFPA 72) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 7:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 7:40 AM 3. Chapter 29 of the National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code and the applicable building code tells us where to install smoke, heat, and CO alarms in homes for this type of fire safety: _________. a. absolute b. reasonable c. likely d. maximal ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code (NFPA 72) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 7:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 7:41 AM

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_26_Smoke, Heat, Carbon Monoxide Alarms, and Security Systems 4. The primary purpose of

detectors is to provide reliable notification to occupants that

__________.

a. may be present b. is definitely present c. may be present and constitute a potential life safety risk d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code (NFPA 72) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 7:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 7:43 AM 5. There is nothing in the NEC about ________. a. installing smoke alarms b. carbon monoxide detectors c. proper wiring for detectors d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code (NFPA 72) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 7:44 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 7:55 AM 6. Smoke, heat, and carbon monoxide alarms are installed in a residence to give the occupants _________ . a. some notice of the presence of fire or toxic fumes b. notice of smoke only c. early warning of the presence of fire or toxic fumes d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Smoke, Heat, and Carbon Monoxide Alarms QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 7:46 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 7:47 AM 7. In nearly all home fires, _______ detectable levels of heat. a. injury comes from b. smoke precedes Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_26_Smoke, Heat, Carbon Monoxide Alarms, and Security Systems c. one should expect high d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Smoke, Heat, and Carbon Monoxide Alarms QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 7:48 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 7:49 AM 8. Nothing in the National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code will prevent injury or death _______. a. if fire is fast-moving b. if proper escape routes have not been planned c. in a high-rise building d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 7:49 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 4:27 AM 9. Some inspectors require a _________ the circuit breaker that serves the alarms so that it will not unintentionally be turned off. a. GFCI type protecting b. AFCI type protecting c. lock-on device over the handle of d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Combination Smoke and Carbon Monoxide Detectors/Alarms QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 7:51 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 7:51 AM 10. You should run the _____ branch circuit to the first alarm, then run the _____ nonmetallic-sheathed cable from the first alarm to all other alarms. a. 3-wire, 3-wire b. 3-wire, 4-wire c. 2-wire, 3-wire d. all of the above ANSWER: c Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_26_Smoke, Heat, Carbon Monoxide Alarms, and Security Systems POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Detector Types - Interconnected QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 7:52 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 7:52 AM 11. Install smoke alarms on the ceiling, as close as possible to the ____ of the room or hallway. a. doorway b. nearest end c. center d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Summary of Dos and Do Nots QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 7:53 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 7:54 AM 12. Smoke and fire alarms should have a(n) _____ and a(n) _____. a. 120-volt source, battery power b. external signal, internal signal c. heat alarm, alarm d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Summary of Dos and Do Nots QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 7:55 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 4:30 AM 13. Install smoke alarms at the high end of a room that has a sloped, gabled, or _____ ceiling where the rise is greater than 1 ft (305 mm) per 8 ft (2.6 m). peaked ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Summary of Dos and Do Nots QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 7:57 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_26_Smoke, Heat, Carbon Monoxide Alarms, and Security Systems DATE MODIFIED:

8/17/2023 7:58 AM

14. The maximum distance between heat alarms mounted on flat ceilings is _____ and 25 ft (7.5 m) from the detector to the wall. a. 25 ft b. 35 ft c. 50 ft d. 75 ft ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Summary of Dos and Do Nots QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 8:00 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 8:03 AM 15. Consider the fact that doors, beams, ____, walls, partitions, and similar obstructions will interfere with the flow of smoke and heat. joists ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Summary of Dos and Do Nots QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 8:04 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 8:04 AM 16. Where appliances use natural gas, propane, or fuel oil as the source of fuel these alarms should be installed: _________. a. smoke alarms b. heat alarms c. carbon monoxide alarms d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Exceeding Minimum Levels of Protection QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 8:05 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 8:05 AM 17. Install smoke alarms in all rooms, basements, heated attached garages, storage areas, and _________. Installing alarms in these locations will increase escape time. hallways ANSWER: Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_26_Smoke, Heat, Carbon Monoxide Alarms, and Security Systems POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Exceeding Minimum Levels of Protection QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 8:07 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 4:35 AM 18. Because conventional smoke alarms can cause nuisance sound, heat alarms should be installed in ________. a. bedrooms b. living rooms c. kitchens d. basements ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Exceeding Minimum Levels of Protection QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 8:08 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 8:08 AM 19. Because these types of fires give off little smoke, heat alarms are installed in garages. These types of fires would be _______. a. gasoline b. auto equipment c. garage d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Exceeding Minimum Levels of Protection QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 8:09 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 8:11 AM 20. Install CO2 alarms wherever appliances use natural gas, propane, or _____. fuel oil ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Exceeding Minimum Levels of Protection QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_26_Smoke, Heat, Carbon Monoxide Alarms, and Security Systems DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

8/17/2023 8:11 AM 8/17/2023 8:11 AM

21. Monitored security systems are connected by _____. If not by this method, they can also be connected over telephone lines to a central station, a 24-hour monitoring facility. Wi-Fi over the Internet ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Security Systems QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 8:12 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 8:12 AM 22. The wiring of a security system consists of small, easy-to-install low-voltage, multiconductor cables made up of _____ conductors. a. 14 AWG b. 16 AWG c. 18 AWG d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Security Systems QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 8:13 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 8:13 AM 23. Circuits are electrically connected in series so that if any part of the circuit is opened, the security system will detect the _____ circuit. a. short b. open c. parallel d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Security Systems QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 8:14 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 8:20 AM 24. Most security systems can detect glass break, floor mat detectors, and _______. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_26_Smoke, Heat, Carbon Monoxide Alarms, and Security Systems door entry ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Security Systems QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 8:20 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 8:20 AM 25. Signalling devices are connected _____. a. in series b. in parallel c. via open circuited d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Security Systems QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 8:21 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 7:09 AM 26. Important and Related UL Standards include: a. UL 217—Standard for Single- and Multiple-Station Alarms b. UL 268—Standard for Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems c. UL 365—Standard for Police Station Connected Burglar Alarm Units d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Standards Relating to Fire, Smoke, Carbon Monoxide, and Security Devices QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 8:22 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 8:23 AM 27. Additional Related UL Standards include: a. UL 521—Standards for Heat Detectors for Fire Protection Signaling Systems b. UL 539—Standard for Single- and Multiple-Station Heat Detectors c. UL 609—Standard for Local Burglar Alarm Units and Systems d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Standards Relating to Fire, Smoke, Carbon Monoxide, and Security Devices Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_26_Smoke, Heat, Carbon Monoxide Alarms, and Security Systems QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 8:23 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 8:24 AM 28. UL Standards related to fire alarms include: a. UL 827—Standard for Central Station Alarm Services b. UL 1023—Standard for Household Burglar Alarm System c. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Standards Relating to Fire, Smoke, Carbon Monoxide, and Security Devices QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 8:24 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 8:25 AM 29. Related UL Standards include: a. UL 1610—Standard for Central Station Burglar Alarm Units b. UL 1641—Standard for Installation and Classification of Residential Burglar Alarm Systems c. UL 2034—Standard for Single- and Multiple-Station Carbon Monoxide Alarms d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Standards Relating to Fire, Smoke, Carbon Monoxide, and Security Devices QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 8:25 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 8:26 AM

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_27_Feeder and Service-Entrance Calculations 1. When figuring kitchen load to calculate residential service size, the following factor must be included: _______. a. 1,500 volt-amperes for each small-appliance branch circuit b. 180 volt-amperes for each kitchen receptacle not on the small-appliance circuits (refrigerator, gas range, clock, etc.) c. 100 volt-amperes for lighting d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Calculations of the Feeder to Panelboard B QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 8:44 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:53 AM 2. When calculating residential service load the volt-amperes that are allowed for each branch circuit serving laundry receptacles would be __________. a. 1,440 volt-amperes b. 1,500 volt-amperes c. 1,920 volt-amperes d. 2,000 volt-amperes ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Calculations of the Feeder to Panelboard B QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 8:46 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 8:46 AM 3. Sizing the neutral conductor only for the normal neutral unbalance current could result in a neutral conductor that is too ____ to safely carry fault currents. a. loose b. large c. erratic d. small ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Neutral Conductor QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 8:47 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/25/2023 12:30 AM 4. The conductor that is not permitted to be smaller than the grounding electrode conductor is the _________. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_27_Feeder and Service-Entrance Calculations a. ungrounded conductor b. feeder conductor c. neutral conductor d. service conductor ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Single-Family Dwelling Service – Entrance Calculations QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 8:51 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 8:52 AM 5. Section 220.61(B) permits the neutral load of ranges, wall-mounted ovens, counter-mounted cooking units, and electric dryers to have the following percent demand factor applied: ________. a. 70 b. 60 c. 80 d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Single-Family Dwelling Service – Entrance Calculations QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 8:52 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 8:53 AM 6. The term noncoincidental load means that the heating and air-conditioner loads will not operate ____________________. a. continuously b. simultaneously c. non-continuously d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Noncoincident Loads QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 8:55 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 8:56 AM 7. If bare conductors are used with insulated conductors in raceways or cables their ampacity is limited to ________ . a. smaller than insulated conductors b. larger than insulated conductors Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_27_Feeder and Service-Entrance Calculations c. same as the insulated conductors d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Neutral Conductor QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 8:56 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:53 AM 8. Loads connected only phase-to-phase or at 240 volts are not included in the calculation of neutral conductors, as _______ from these circuits is placed on the neutral. a. phase current b. no load c. some current d. small load ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Neutral Conductor QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 8:57 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 8:58 AM 9. The _______ conductor of any service must never be smaller than the required grounding electrode conductor for that particular service. grounded ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Neutral Conductor QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 9:00 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 9:01 AM 10. The neutral conductor is permitted to be smaller than the _______ conductors, but only if it can be verified by calculations required in 215.2, 220.61, and 230.42. “hot” ungrounded ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Neutral Conductor QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_27_Feeder and Service-Entrance Calculations DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

8/17/2023 9:02 AM 8/25/2023 12:40 AM

11. For a one-family residence, the minimum-size main service disconnecting means is ________. a. 75-amperes b. 100-amperes c. 150-amperes d. 200-amperes ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Sizing of Service-Entrance Conductors and Service Disconnecting Means QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 9:02 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 9:03 AM 12. The General Lighting Load for a residence is generally computed under 220.82(B) to be _________. a. 5 VA per aq. ft. b. 3 VA per aq. ft. c. 10 VA per aq. ft. d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Feeder to Panelboard A QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 9:04 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 9:05 AM 13. Service conductors for 100-ampere to 400-ampere services under certain conditions are allowed to be sized at what percentage of the service rating: _______. a. 75% b. 83% c. 85% d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Single-Family Dwelling Service – Entrance Calculations QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 9:05 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 9:06 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_27_Feeder and Service-Entrance Calculations 14. Section 220.61(B) permits the neutral load of ranges, wall-mounted ovens, counter-mounted cooking units, and electric dryers to have a percentage demand factor applied of ______. a. 65% b. 60% c. 70% d. 75% ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Single-Family Dwelling Service – Entrance Calculations QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 9:06 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 9:07 AM 15. Under 220.82(B), to the lighting load you must add _____ watts for each 2-wire, 20-ampere small appliance and laundry branch circuit. a. 1000 b. 500 c. 1500 d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Optional Calculations (NEC Article 220, Part IV) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 9:08 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 9:08 AM 16. In certain parts of the country where extremely hot temperatures are common, the AHJ will probably require these types of correction factors in accordance with Table 310.15: ________. ambient temperature correction factors ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: High Temperatures QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 9:09 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 9:09 AM 17. In Table 310.16, conductor ampacities are rated at _______. a. 40°C (104°F) b. 30°C (86°F) c. 25°C (77°F) Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_27_Feeder and Service-Entrance Calculations d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Single-Family Dwelling Service – Entrance Calculations QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 9:14 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 9:15 AM 18. Conductors in raceways or cables exposed to direct sunlight (on a roof or side of a building) need to be corrected _______. a. by using 90% of rated ampacity b. not if exposure is less than 3 hours c. according to 310.15(B)(2) d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: High Temperatures QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 9:15 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 7:13 AM 19. The average ambient summer temperature of a locality is listed by _________. a. the NEC b. UL c. the U.S. Weather Bureau d. NFPA ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: High Temperatures QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 9:18 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 9:18 AM 20. The reason hotter climates require derating conductors is _______. a. rooftops get hotter than expected b. conductors may exceed their rated ampacity c. ampacities are maximized at 86°F max d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_27_Feeder and Service-Entrance Calculations REFERENCES: High Temperatures QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 9:19 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 5:56 AM

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_28_Installing Feeders and Service-Entrance Equipment—Grounding and Bonding 1. For a feeder, it is common to install ____ or _____. a. conduit, raceway b. bare, branch conductors c. 100-amperes, 150-amperes d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Feeder to Panelboard A QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 9:30 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 2:00 AM 2. A panelboard fed by a feeder shall not be installed _______. a. in cabinets b. in laundry room c. in bathroom d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Working Space QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 9:32 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 6:14 AM 3. The depth of a working space must be no less than __________. a. 10 in b. 36 in c. 12 in d. 20 in ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Working Space QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 11:36 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 2:10 AM 4. The size of 3 conductors of 3 AWG in a feeder is __________. a. 0.185 in b. 0.200 in c. 0.2886 in Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_28_Installing Feeders and Service-Entrance Equipment—Grounding and Bonding d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Table 28-2 Minimum Size of EMT or PVC for Feeder to Panelboard B QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 11:38 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 2:14 AM 5. In a feeder panelboard (sub-panel), the neutral conductor terminal bar in the feeder panelboard is _____. a. connected to the enclosure b. isolated from the enclosure c. placed anywhere in the enclosure d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Feeder to Panelboard A QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 11:38 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 4:47 AM 6. The NEC defines the term service in Article 100 as the conductors and equipment connecting the _______ to the wiring system of the premises served. a. main panel b. circuit breakers c. serving utility d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 11:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 11:41 AM 7. The point where the utility’s supply ends and the customer’s premises wiring begins is called the __________. a. utility point b. service point c. demarcation point d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_28_Installing Feeders and Service-Entrance Equipment—Grounding and Bonding REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 11:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 5:41 AM 8. Between the serving utility and the service point there is a service drop that comprises this type of conductor: _________. a. overhead b. underground c. lateral d. feeder ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Important Definitions QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 11:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 11:43 AM 9. Service lateral conductors are the underground conductors installed between the utility electric transformer and _______. a. service drop b. panelboard c. service point d. the meter ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Underground Service QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 11:44 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 11:45 AM 10. A ground fault is an _______, electrically conductive connection between an ungrounded conductor of an electrical circuit and the normally non-current-carrying conductors, metal enclosures, metal raceways, metal equipment, or earth. unintentional ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Grounding QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 11:45 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_28_Installing Feeders and Service-Entrance Equipment—Grounding and Bonding DATE MODIFIED:

8/17/2023 11:45 AM

11. To calculate the proper size raceways for conductors, the first step would be to determine the _______ of each of the cables to be used, using Table 5 in Chapter 9. a. ampacity b. voltage rating c. size (area) d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Table 28-1 Minimum Size of EMT or PVC for Feeder to Panelboard A QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 11:46 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 11:47 AM 12. NEC 300.4(G) states that if ____ AWG or larger ungrounded circuit conductors enter a cabinet, box enclosure or raceway, an insulating bushing or equivalent must be used. a. 4 b. 6 c. 8 d. 10 ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Why Are Grounding/Bonding/Insulating Bushings Installed? QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 11:47 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 11:48 AM 13. The conduit maximum fill (depending on number of conductors) may be _______. a. 31% b. 53% c. 40% d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Table 28-1 Minimum Size of EMT or PVC for Feeder to Panelboard A QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 11:50 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 11:51 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_28_Installing Feeders and Service-Entrance Equipment—Grounding and Bonding 14. To determine the proper size raceways for conductors, one must determine _______. a. number and types of conductors b. maximum conduit fill depending on number of conductors c. material and type of conduit d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Table 28-1 Minimum Size of EMT or PVC for Feeder to Panelboard A QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 11:51 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 11:52 AM 15. All residential electrical systems in the United States are __________. a. wye-connected systems b. 120/208-volt systems c. grounded systems d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Grounding/Bonding (Article 250) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 11:52 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 5:42 AM 16. The grounded conductor is _______________. a. a circuit conductor intentionally grounded (earthed) b. a green conductor c. the third wire of a service d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Grounding QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 11:53 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 11:54 AM 17. A grounding electrode conductor in a typical residential setting is the conductor that connects the system _____ conductor to a grounding electrode or to a point on the grounding electrode system. a. phase conductors b. device Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_28_Installing Feeders and Service-Entrance Equipment—Grounding and Bonding c. grounded d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Grounding QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 11:54 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 2:21 AM 18. Bonding means normally ________ electrically conductive materials, that are likely to become energized, shall be connected together. a. non-current-carrying b. current-carrying c. grounded d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Bonding QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 11:56 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 11:57 AM 19. Concrete-enclosed electrode is considered good because ________. a. it does not have to be supplemented b. there is no need to check for the maximum 25-ohm requirement c. it provides permanent moisture which means low-impedance d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: What’s So Good about a Concrete-Encased Electrode? QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 11:58 AM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 12:02 PM 20. Providing a proper ground-fault current path helps ensure that certain types of protective devices will operate fast when responding to ground faults. These types include ______. a. overcurrent protective devices b. short circuit protective devices c. TVSS protective devices d. all of the above Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_28_Installing Feeders and Service-Entrance Equipment—Grounding and Bonding ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Bonding QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 12:08 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 12:09 PM 21. Ground rods must be at least this number of ft. in length: _________. a. 6 b. 8 c. 10 d. 12 ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Ground Rod Rules QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 12:09 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 12:10 PM 22. Ground rods must be installed, when possible, _______. a. in contact with soil b. under the structure c. below the permanent moisture level d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Ground Rod Rules QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 12:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 12:12 PM 23. The most common ground rods are copper-clad steel. Rods not permitted are _____. a. Zinc b. Aluminum c. Alloy d. Lead ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Ground Rod Rules QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_28_Installing Feeders and Service-Entrance Equipment—Grounding and Bonding HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 12:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 2:28 AM 24. When used as a grounding electrode, a _______ does not have to be supplemented as does a metal underground water piping system. a. stainless steel rod b. re-bar c. concrete-encased electrode d. steel plate ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Grounding and Bonding the Electrical System in a Typical Residence QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 12:13 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 6:16 AM 25. When using ground rods, pipes, or plates as grounding electrodes, they must be supplemented unless it can be shown that a single grounding electrode has a resistance to ground of __________. a. 10 ohms or less b. 15 ohms or less c. 25 ohms or less d. 50 ohms or less ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Grounding and Bonding the Electrical System in a Typical Residence QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 12:18 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 5:43 AM 26. The simplest way to provide proper and adequate grounding for the equipment in a detached garage is to install underground cable Type UF that contains an equipment grounding conductor or a _______. grounded metal raceway ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Feeder to Detached Garage QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 12:25 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 6:17 AM 27. When a feeder supplies a panelboard in a separate building that has more than one branch circuit, you may install, Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_28_Installing Feeders and Service-Entrance Equipment—Grounding and Bonding using a proper cable with an equipment grounding conductor, or a _______that is acceptable as an equipment grounding conductor in NEC 25.118(A). metal raceway ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Feeder to Detached Garage QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 12:26 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 12:26 PM 28. As an alternate to grounding an accessory building, you may install a separate equipment grounding conductor _____ (in a cable or in a nonmetallic raceway) between the main building service equipment or panelboard and the panelboard in the second building. a. to a ground rod b. of the wire type c. to a water pipe d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Feeder to Detached Garage QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 12:28 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 12:29 PM 29. The neutral bus and the equipment grounding bus in the second building ______. a. are connected together b. are not connected together c. may be connected together d. are required to be connected together ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Feeder to Detached Garage QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 12:29 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 5:44 AM 30. When feeding a panelboard in a second building, a grounding electrode system _____. a. is not required at the second building b. is required at the second building c. is optional at the second building Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_28_Installing Feeders and Service-Entrance Equipment—Grounding and Bonding d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Feeder to Detached Garage QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 12:30 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 5:45 AM

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_29_Overcurrent Protection—Fuses and Circuit Breakers 1. NEC 240.4(B) states that under certain conditions the overcurrent device shall be permitted to be the next higher standard rating. This rule is limited to devices that are _______ or less. a. 400-amperes b. 600-amperes c. 800-amperes d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Key NEC Requirements for Overcurrent Protection QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 12:48 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 12:50 PM 2. NEC Section 240.22 requires that overcurrent devices are generally not permitted in the grounded conductor. Exceptions are if such device(s) _______. a. opens all conductors of the circuit at the same time b. have visual indications c. are used for lighting loads d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Key NEC Requirements for Overcurrent Protection QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 12:50 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 6:20 AM 3. Ampacity of service-entrance conductors under certain conditions can be rated _____. a. 75% of the overcurrent device b. 83% of the overcurrent device c. 90% of the overcurrent device d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Key NEC Requirements for Overcurrent Protection QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 12:52 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 12:53 PM 4. The NEC Section that requires overcurrent protection to be provided for each ungrounded (“hot”) conductor is _______. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_29_Overcurrent Protection—Fuses and Circuit Breakers a. 240.24(B) b. 230.70(C) c. 230.91 d. 240.15(A) ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Key NEC Requirements for Overcurrent Protection QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 12:53 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 6:21 AM 5. The correct conductor to the maximum overcurrent protection of 15-amperes would be ______. 14 AWG gage ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Key NEC Requirements for Overcurrent Protection QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 12:54 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 12:55 PM 6. Normal loading of a circuit is when the current flowing is _______ the capability of the circuit and/or the connected equipment. a. 90-110% of b. 85-100% of c. within d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Five Circuit Conditions QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 12:55 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 12:56 PM 7. An overload is a condition where the current flowing is _________ the circuit and/or connected equipment is designed to safely carry. a. just under what b. more than c. less than d. all of the above ANSWER: b Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_29_Overcurrent Protection—Fuses and Circuit Breakers POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Five Circuit Conditions QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 12:57 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 12:58 PM 8. A Short Circuit is defined as _______. a condition when two or more normally insulated circuit conductors come in contact with ANSWER: one another, resulting in a current flow that bypasses the connected load POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Five Circuit Conditions QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 12:58 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 6:22 AM 9. A ground fault is a condition when a ________conductor comes in contact with a grounded surface. a. neutral b. “hot” or ungrounded c. equipment ground d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Five Circuit Conditions QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 12:59 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 1:00 PM 10. A condition where the circuit is not closed somewhere in the circuit, and no current can flow is defined as a(n) _______. a. ground fault b. short circuit c. open circuit d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Five Circuit Conditions QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:00 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_29_Overcurrent Protection—Fuses and Circuit Breakers DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 6:24 AM 11. Overcurrent protection for residential services, branch circuits, and feeders is provided by circuit breakers or fuses. These are the “____”. a. life forces of an electrical circuit b. backup of an electrical circuit c. safety valves of an electrical circuit d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: The Basics QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:01 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 5:57 AM 12. Edison-base plug fuses may be used under the conditions where ________. a. the fuses have ampere ratings of 0 through 30-amperes b. plug fuses have a hexagonal configuration somewhere on the fuse if 15-amperes or less c. circuits have a grounded neutral where no conductor operates at over 150 volts to ground d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Edison-Base Plug Fuses QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:04 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 1:05 PM 13. Various fuses have different time-current characteristics. The characteristic that tends not to operate on momentary overloads would be _______. a. nontime-delay b. time-delay, loaded link c. time-delay, dual-element d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Fuse Characteristics QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:05 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 6:26 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_29_Overcurrent Protection—Fuses and Circuit Breakers 14. All new plug fuse installations shall be fuse Type _____. a. S b. T c. F d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Type S Fuses QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 1:07 PM 15. The most common type of dual-element cartridge fuses are available with ampere ratings from 0 through _____. a. 400-amperes b. 600-amperes c. 800-amperes d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Fuses QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/24/2023 1:02 AM 16. The NEC permits 100% continuous loading on an overcurrent device _______. only under certain conditions ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: How much Load Can a Circuit Breaker Safely Carry? QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:08 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 7:04 AM 17. Use 2-pole circuit breakers on 3-wire 120/240-volt branch circuits (two “hots” and one neutral) for loads such as electric ________. a. ranges b. ovens c. clothes dryers d. all of the above ANSWER: d Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_29_Overcurrent Protection—Fuses and Circuit Breakers POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: One 2-Pole or Two Single-Pole Circuit Breakers QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:09 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 6:00 AM 18. The use of handle ties, which connect the handles of two single-pole circuit breakers together so both poles trip together, is _______. a. always permitted b. never permitted c. permitted for a few specific applications d. safe in all circumstances ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: One 2-Pole or Two Single-Pole Circuit Breakers QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 1:10 PM 19. Handle ties generally ______ two single-pole circuit breakers to be switched off or on. a. do allow b. trip both handle-tied c. do not allow d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: One 2-Pole or Two Single-Pole Circuit Breakers QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 3:14 AM 20. The interrupting rating is the _______ current a device (usually taken to mean a circuit breaker) can open safely during an abnormal condition such as a short-circuit or ground-fault. a. maximum b. minimum c. normal d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Interrupting Ratings for Fuses and Circuit Breakers Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_29_Overcurrent Protection—Fuses and Circuit Breakers QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 1:12 PM 21. Circuit breakers used in dwellings typically are rated to interrupt ________. a. 5,000-amperes b. 10,000-amperes c. 15,000-amperes d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Interrupting Ratings for Fuses and Circuit Breakers QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:13 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 1:13 PM 22. The interrupting rating of a fuse or circuit breaker does not indicate the short-circuit rating of the _______. a. conductors b. service c. panelboard d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Interrupting Rating QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:14 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 6:32 AM 23. Interrupting rating is chosen to prevent _________. a. damage to the conductors b. damage to the panel c. personal injury d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Circuit Impedance, Short-Circuit Current Ratings, and Other Characteristics QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:18 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 1:19 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_29_Overcurrent Protection—Fuses and Circuit Breakers 24. Equipment intended to interrupt current at fault levels shall have an interrupting rating at nominal circuit voltage at least equal to the _______. available fault current ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Interrupting Rating QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 3:24 AM 25. The unique characteristic of a series-rated combination is that the upstream circuit breaker has a _____ interrupting rating and the downstream circuit breakers have a _____ interrupting rating. a. low, low b. low, high c. high, low d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Series Rated versus Fully Rated Panelboards QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:20 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 1:21 PM 26. Currently, most popular residential panelboard installed are series rated. The main circuit breaker has an interrupting rating of _____ amperes. The branch-circuit breakers have an interrupting rating of _____ amperes. a. 10,000, 5000 b. 10,000, 10,000 c. 22,000, 10,000 d. 22,000, 20,000 ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Panelboards . . . What Are They? QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:21 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 3:27 AM 27. With series-rated panelboards, what is compromised is _______. a. impedance b. selection of breakers c. selectivity Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_29_Overcurrent Protection—Fuses and Circuit Breakers d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Series Rated versus Fully Rated Panelboards QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:24 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 5:59 AM 28. The upstream high interrupting rated overcurrent device is permitted to be in _____. a. a smaller enclosure as the lower interrupting rated devices b. the same enclosure as the lower interrupting rated devices c. a larger enclosure as the lower interrupting rated devices d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Series Rated versus Fully Rated Panelsboards QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:25 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 6:02 AM

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_30_Swimming Pools, Spas, Hot Tubs, Hydromassage Baths, and Electrically Powered Pool Lifts 1. Special Code requirements are necessary to protect people against the hazards of electric shock associated with hydromassage bathtubs, electrically powered pool lifts, and ________. a. swimming pools b. spas c. hot tubs d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:40 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 1:41 PM 2. A direct shock can result if a person touches a _______. a. live wire b. metal ladder c. fence d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Electrical Hazards QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:43 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 6:34 AM 3. Indirect shock can result from _______. a. merely being in the water b. getting out of the water c. touching pool walls or bottom d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Electrical Hazards QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:44 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 6:36 AM 4. The most sensitive or vulnerable parts of the body to electric shock while a person is submersed in water is _______. a. cuts and scratches b. ears Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_30_Swimming Pools, Spas, Hot Tubs, Hydromassage Baths, and Electrically Powered Pool Lifts c. nose and mouth d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Electrical Hazards QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:46 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 1:46 PM 5. Voltage gradients in the pool water can be _____________. a. 10 volts b. 20 volts c. 30 volts or higher d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Electrical Hazards QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:46 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 1:47 PM 6. The pool walls and bottom are assumed to be part of the conductive pool shell and at ground, or zero, potential. Potential shock hazards can be ______. a. the metal ladder used for exit b. the water itself c. the finished surface around the pool d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Electrical Hazards QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:47 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 3:35 AM 7. Paralysis can be caused by voltage gradients as low as __________. a. 0.3 volts per foot b. 2.0 volts per foot c. 1½ volts per foot d. all of the above ANSWER: c Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_30_Swimming Pools, Spas, Hot Tubs, Hydromassage Baths, and Electrically Powered Pool Lifts POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Electrical Hazards QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:49 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 1:50 PM 8. The water makes contact with the entire skin surface of the body rather than just at one ____. a. area b. “touch” point c. surface d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Electrical Hazards QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:51 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 1:52 PM 9. Metal conduit wiring methods are permitted to be installed underground within ______. a. 3 ft horizontally from the inside wall of the pool b. 5 ft horizontally from the inside wall of the pool c. 10 ft horizontally from the inside wall of the pool d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Underground Wiring Location, 680.11 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:53 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 1:56 PM 10. The type of protection required for pool pump motors regardless if the motor is connected by cord-and-plug or the motor is connected with “hard wiring” is ________. a. AFCI b. none c. GFCI ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Wiring Methods for Motors QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_30_Swimming Pools, Spas, Hot Tubs, Hydromassage Baths, and Electrically Powered Pool Lifts DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:56 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 1:57 PM 11. Luminaries, lighting outlets, and ceiling-suspended (paddle) fans where they are suspended above and out to 5 ft. horizontally from the pool, are required to be installed at a height no less than _____. a. 20 ft above the pool’s maximum water level b. 8 ft above the pool’s maximum water level c. 12 ft above the pool’s maximum water level d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Luminaires, Lighting Outlets, and Ceiling-Suspended (Paddle) Fans. 680.22(B) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:58 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 1:58 PM 12. Luminaries mounted in walls shall be installed with the top of the luminaire lens not less than _____. a. 12 in. below the normal water level of the pool unless listed otherwise b. 18 in. below the normal water level of the pool unless listed otherwise c. 20 in. below the normal water level of the pool unless listed otherwise d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: No-Niche Luminaires, 680.23(D) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 1:59 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 2:00 PM 13. Bonding of ________ is very important. MULTIPLE ANSWERS ARE POSSIBLE a. conductive pool shells b. perimeter surfaces within 3 ft c. underwater lighting d. metallic components ANSWER: a, b, c, d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Equipotential Bonding, 680.26 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 2:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 2:11 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_30_Swimming Pools, Spas, Hot Tubs, Hydromassage Baths, and Electrically Powered Pool Lifts 14. All of the metal parts that are associated with electrical equipment for the pool require bonding, including ______. a. water circulating system b. filtration equipment c. pool covers and their electric motors d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Electrical Equipment, 680.26(B)(6) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 2:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 2:13 PM 15. The fixed metal parts around pools that require bonding are those that are within _______. a. 10 ft. horizontally b. 3 ft. horizontally c. 5 ft. horizontally d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Electrical Equipment, 680.26(B)(6) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 2:14 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 2:14 PM 16. Where there are no metal parts in contact with the water, there still is a need to bond the water to an approved corrosion-resistant conductive surface in contact with the water. This surface cannot be less than ________. a. 9 in2 b. 10 in2 c. 12 in2 d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Pool Water, 680.26(C) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 2:28 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 5:50 AM 17. In corrosive environments the wiring method not permitted is _________. a. electrical metallic tubing Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_30_Swimming Pools, Spas, Hot Tubs, Hydromassage Baths, and Electrically Powered Pool Lifts b. rigid metal conduit c. intermediate metal conduit d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Wiring Methods in Corrosive Environment, 680.14 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 2:34 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 2:34 PM 18. UL Standards covering pools include ________. a. UL 676 Underwater Lighting Fixtures b. UL 943 Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters c. UL 1081 Swimming Pool Pumps, Filters, and Chlorinators d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: UL Standards QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 2:35 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 2:36 PM 19. Additional UL Standards covering pools are ________. a. UL 1241 Junction Boxes for Underwater Pool Luminaires b. UL 1563 Electric Spas, Equipment Assemblies, and Associated Equipment c. UL 1795 Hydromassage Bathtubs d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: UL Standards QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 2:36 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 2:37 PM

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_31_Wiring for the Future_Home Automation Systems 1. The ZigBee wireless communications system uses _______. a. carrier wave signals b. video signals c. satellite signals d. low-power radio signals ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Zigbee QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 2:49 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 6:53 AM 2. Those that are susceptible to interference from ac power lines include ______. a. ZigBee systems b. Z-Wave devices c. X10 modules d. Insteon systems ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Limitations of X10 Technology QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 2:50 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 2:53 PM 3. X10 technology transmits signals that are superimposed on the 120/240-volt, 60-cycle branch-circuit wiring in the home. These signals are _______. carrier wave signals ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: The X10 System QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 2:53 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 6:55 AM 4. Z-Wave devices may be compatible with _______ devices. a. Zigbee b. X10 c. Insteon d. all of the above ANSWER: b Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_31_Wiring for the Future_Home Automation Systems POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Z-Wave QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:47 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:48 PM 5. The low-power wireless communication system that operates on 868.42 MHz is the _______. a. X10 system b. ZigBee system c. Z-Wave system d. Insteon system ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Z Wave QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:52 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:53 PM 6. This system, transmits carrier wave signals that are superimposed on the regular 120/240-volt, 60-cycle branch-circuit wiring in a home. This is the _______. a. X10 system b. ZigBee system c. Z-Wave system d. Insteon system ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: The X10 System QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:53 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:54 PM 7. This system uses both wireless and hard-wired technology. This is the ______. a. X10 system b. ZigBee system c. Z-Wave system d. Insteon system ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Insteon QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_31_Wiring for the Future_Home Automation Systems HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:54 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:56 PM 8. This is the low-power wireless communication system that primarily operates on 2.4 GHz or 915 MHz. This is the ______. a. X10 system b. ZigBee system c. Z-Wave system d. Insteon system ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Zigbee QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:57 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:57 PM 9. Home automation systems can be wireless, hard wired, or _______. hybrid ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Let’s Get Started QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:58 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 3:59 PM 10. Home automation has the ability to control lighting, heating and cooling, and _______. appliances ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Let's Get Started QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:59 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 5:01 AM 11. Home automation has the ability to check security, allow remote access, or _______. monitor video cameras ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Let's Get Started QUESTION TYPE: Essay Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_31_Wiring for the Future_Home Automation Systems HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 3:59 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:00 PM 12. Home automation equipment from different manufacturers can _______. a. be the same color b. operate some devices (not others) c. be incompatible d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Let’s Get Started QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:02 PM 13. The abbreviation M means ______. a. thousands b. millions c. billions d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Terminology QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:06 PM 14. This number of bits make one byte, ________. a. 10 b. 100 c. 8 d. 6 ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Terminology QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:07 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_31_Wiring for the Future_Home Automation Systems 15. The jacks (connectors) for Cat 5 cables are generally _______. a. RJ-11 6-pin jack b. RJ-45 10-pin jack c. F connectors d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Terminology QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:09 PM 16. The term F connectors refers to ________. a. telecommunications b. connectors for coaxial cable c. television connectors d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Combination Outlets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:10 PM 17. The letter G or term giga means __________. a. one thousand b. one million c. one billion d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Combination Outlets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:12 PM 18. Four-pair nontwisted cable, referred to as quad wire, is not suitable for modern audio, data, and __________. ANSWER:

imaging applications

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_31_Wiring for the Future_Home Automation Systems POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Cable Types and Installation Recommendations QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 5:25 AM 19. Category 5e cable can support data networks up to _______. a. l00 MHz b. 200 MHz c. 350 MHz d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Cable Types and Installation Recommendations QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:13 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 6:58 AM 20. Category 7 is the best choice where high performance is needed. It can support data networks up to _______. a. 500 MHz b. 600 MHz c. 700 MHz d. 800 MHz ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Cable Types and Installation Recommendations QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:14 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:15 PM 21. Category 6 has 4 twisted pairs and can support data networks up to _______. a. 700 MHz b. 600 MHz c. 500 MHz d. 250 MHz ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Cable Types and Installation Recommendations QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_31_Wiring for the Future_Home Automation Systems HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:16 PM 22. Category 5e is basically the same as Cat. 5 but made to tighter tolerances. It can support data networks up to ________. a. 500 MHz b. 350 MHz c. 700 MHz d. 900 MHz ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Cable Types and Installation Recommendations QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:16 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 5:27 AM

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_32_Standby Power Systems 1. This type of equipment should always be listed by a qualified electrical testing laboratory: a. generators b. power inlets c. transfer switches d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Precautions to Follow When Operating a Generator QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:28 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:29 PM 2. Precautions when operating a standby generator include ___________. a. Do not stand in water or otherwise work on electrical equipment with wet hands b. Do not touch bare wires c. Do not operate generators indoors d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Precautions to Follow When Operating a Generator QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:29 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 5:05 AM 3. Characteristics of carbon monoxide include _______. a. odorless b. colorless c. tasteless d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Safety Alert QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:30 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 6:59 AM 4. Exhaust gases contain deadly carbon monoxide, the same as an automobile engine. Carbon monoxide can cause _______. a. nausea b. fainting Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_32_Standby Power Systems c. death d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Safety Alert QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:31 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 7:00 AM 5. Safety warnings about generators include Store gasoline only in approved red containers marked “GASOLINE”, do not operate them in the garage, and ______. do not operate them close to windows ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Precautions to Follow When Operating a Generator QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:32 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:32 PM 6. One type of standby generator is a permanent generator where the neutral is switched by the transfer switch. The neutral is bonded to the frame of the generator and is considered a ________. a. self-contained system b. non-separately derived system c. separately-derived system d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:32 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 5:08 AM 7. A type of generator where the neutral is not switched by the transfer switch, and the neutral is isolated from the frame is considered a ______. a. non-grounded system b. non-separately derived system c. non-isolated system d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_32_Standby Power Systems REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:34 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 5:29 AM 8. When connected to the service-supplied electrical system by cord-and-plug connection, the system is also considered a _______ when the neutral is also switched in the transfer equipment. a. separately derived system b. non-separately derived system c. independent system d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:35 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:35 PM 9. Some manufacturers produce a generator where the neutral is isolated, or floating from the frame. The generator should not be operated in a stand-alone arrangement and is considered to be a __________. a. separately derived system b. non-separately derived system c. cord connected system d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:35 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:37 PM 10. Without a standby generator, a power outage can cause __________. a. water pipes freezing b. refrigerator and freezer not running c. furnace not operating d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Why Standby (Temporary) Power? QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_32_Standby Power Systems HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:37 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:37 PM 11. A permanent generator where the neutral is not switched by the transfer switch is classified as __________. a. a standby generator b. an emergency generator c. a non-separately derived system d. a frame-connected neutral generator ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:37 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:38 PM 12. The simplest and usually cheapest option for a generator is a ________. a. gasoline powered generator b. portable generator c. pull-to-start generator d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: The Simplest QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:39 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 5:30 AM 13. When regular power fails, with a cheaper generator you must __________. a. manually start the generator b. flip the transfer switching device c. plug in the power “patch” cord d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: The Next Step Up QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:40 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:40 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_32_Standby Power Systems 14. For a top-of-the line permanently installed generator, the automatic transfer switch monitors the incoming utility’s voltage. Should a power outage occur, the transfer switch “transfers”, the selected loads continue to function, and the standby generator_______. automatically starts ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Top Of The Line QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:41 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:41 PM 15. Ground Fault Interrupter (GFI) on a portable generator should have a ______. a. frame-bonded neutral to protect the generator user b. floating neutral to protect the generator user c. transfer switch operated neutral to protect the generator user d. all of the above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Receptacles on Portable Generator Sets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:42 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:43 PM 16. The neutral bus in a panelboard that serves selected loads must _____be connected to the metal panelboard enclosure. a. always b. not c. manually d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Wiring Diagrams for Typical Standby QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:43 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:44 PM 17. When purchasing a portable generator, insist the ________. a. floating neutral is in place b. transfer switch is in place c. neutral-to-case bond is in place d. all of the above Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_32_Standby Power Systems ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Wiring Diagrams for Typical Standby Generator QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:44 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:44 PM 18. The total time for complete transfer to standby power is approximately _____. a. 5 seconds b. 6-8 seconds c. 45–60 seconds d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Wiring Diagrams for Typical Standby Generator QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:45 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 5:31 AM 19. An automatic type of standby power system "exercises" periodically for ______. a. 3 minutes b. 5-7 minutes c. 7-15 minutes d. 30 minutes ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Wiring Diagrams for a Typical Standby Generator QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:45 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 5:33 AM 20. In order to indicate where the permanently installed standby generator is located and what type of standby power it is, a sign must be placed at the ___________. a. front door or nearby b. driveway c. main panelboard emergency disconnecting means d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Wiring Diagrams for Typical Standby Generator Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_32_Standby Power Systems QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:46 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:47 PM 21. A transfer switch must do this to avoid feedback to and from the generator. The transfer switch must _______________. isolate the utility source from the standby source ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Transfer Switches or Equipment QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:48 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 5:17 AM 22. A transfer switch that is connected to the line side of the main service disconnect must be listed as ________________. suitable for use as service equipment ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Transfer Switches or Equipment QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:50 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 5:21 AM 23. Depending on how the type of system is being installed, for home installations, transfer switches may be 1-pole, double throw (SPDT), 2-pole, double throw (DPDT) or _______. 3-pole, double throw (TPDT) ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Transfer Switches or Equipment QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:51 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:53 PM 24. A transfer switch must ____. a. break before make b. make before break c. connect to main service d. all of the above ANSWER: a Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_32_Standby Power Systems POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Transfer Switches or Equipment QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:53 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:54 PM 25. A typical transfer switch might take _____ to eliminate starting the generator for momentary outages. a. 10-15 seconds b. 15-30 seconds c. 30-45 seconds d. 45-60 seconds ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: System Capacity and Ratings of Transfer Equipment (NEC 702.4) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:54 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 6:24 AM 26. NEC 590.6(A)(3) requires that all 125 volt and 125/250 volt, single-phase, 15-, 20-, and 30 ampere receptacle outlets that are a part of a ____ kW or smaller portable generator shall have listed ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection for personnel. a. 10 b. 15 c. 25 d. 50 ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Receptacles on Portable Generator QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:56 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:57 PM 27. It is _______ to run standby power conductors and normal power conductors in the same raceway or enclosure. a. not permissible b. permissible c. permissible only in IMC or RMC d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: The National Electrical Code® requirements Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_32_Standby Power Systems QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:57 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 4:57 PM 28. A sign shall be placed at the disconnecting means required in 230.85 that indicates the location of each permanently installed on-site optional standby power source disconnect or means to shut down the prime mover as required in 445.19(C). This is true for ________. a. all buildings b. one- and two- family dwelling units c. commercial buildings only d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: The National Electrical Code® requirements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 4:58 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 5:00 PM 29. It is permissible to run standby power conductors and normal power conductors in the same raceway or enclosure. This is stated in NEC section _______. a. 702.10 b. 702.5 c. 701.30 d. 701.12 ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: The National Electrical Code® requirements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:01 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 5:34 AM

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_33_Residential Photovoltaic Systems 1. Many residential PV systems use _________. a. solar panels b. mounting racks c. combiner/transition boxes d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: The Basic Grid-Connected PV System QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:24 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 5:24 PM 2. Some residential PV systems, components may operate based on time of day, be sized to allow off-grid operation, or _________. use batteries to store energy ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:25 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 6:15 AM 3. A PV module is made up of an aluminum frame housing many __________. semiconductor PV cells ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: PV Cells, Modules, and Arrays QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:27 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 5:45 AM 4. Components that must be listed or be field evaluated and field labeled for the PV application include _________. a. motor generators b. PV panels c. dc combiners d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_33_Residential Photovoltaic Systems DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:27 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 5:28 PM 5. Complete PV systems usually include multiple modules, combiner(s), and ______. converter ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: PV Cells, Modules, and Arrays QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:30 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 5:31 PM 6. PV systems that operate at _______ between any two conductors shall be protected by a listed PV arc-fault circuit interrupter or other system components that are listed to provide equivalent protection. a. under 80 volts b. 80 volts dc or greater c. 120 volts or greater d. all of the above ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Arc-Fault Protection (Direct Current) QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:31 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 5:32 PM 7. A system to perform _____ of PV systems on buildings is required to reduce shock hazards for firefighters and other emergency personnel. a. disconnecting b. grounding c. rapid shutdown d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Rapid Shutdown of PV Systems on Buildings QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:32 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 5:33 PM 8. The rapid shutdown initiation device is permitted to consist of the service disconnecting means, the PV system disconnecting means, or a ______. readily accessible switch indicating on or off ANSWER: Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_33_Residential Photovoltaic Systems POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Rapid Shutdown of PV Systems on Buildings QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:33 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 5:35 AM 9. Rapid shutdown is required to reduce voltage to _____ volts within a boundary of 1 ft. from the PV array within 30 seconds. a. zero b. 25 c. 30 d. all of the above ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Rapid Shutdown of PV Systems on Buildings QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:34 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 5:35 PM 10. The equipment disconnecting means is required to simultaneously disconnect all current-carrying conductors that are not solidly grounded. It __________. a. must indicate whether it is in the open or closed position b. is required to be lockable c. is required to be externally operable d. all of the above ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Part III. Disconnecting Means QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:36 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 5:35 AM 11. Ground fault protection equipment identified for the combination of the dc-to-dc converter and ground-fault protection device must cease to supply power to output circuits and interrupt the faulted PV system dc circuits, or ______. disconnect all current-carrying conductors of the faulted circuit ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Ground-fault protection QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_33_Residential Photovoltaic Systems STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:39 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 5:39 PM 12. Wiring methods and enclosures, such as exposed raceways, cable trays, covers or enclosures of pull boxes and junction boxes and other wiring methods that contain PV power source system dc circuit conductors must be marked with the wording _____________. PHOTOVOLTAIC POWER SOURCE or SOLAR PV DC CIRCUIT ANSWER: POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Part IV. Wiring Methods QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:40 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 5:40 PM 13. Sunlight may be more intense in the field than at the testing lab, so 690.8(A)(1)(a) requires the module short-circuit current to be multiplied by _______. a. 125% b. 150% c. 110% d. 100% ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Part II. Circuit Requirements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:41 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 7:02 AM 14. Exposed single-conductor cable is permitted to be installed for array interconnection, and only permitted are listed PV wire and _____. a. USE types b. USE-2 types c. PV-2 types d. USP types ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Part IV. Wiring Methods QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:42 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/23/2023 5:36 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter_33_Residential Photovoltaic Systems 15. A dedicated PV system circuit breaker, suitable for backfeed and positioned at the opposite end of the bus from the ____, is a requirement of NEC 705.12(B)(3)(2). a. panelboard b. disconnecting means c. main circuit breaker d. modules ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: Connection of Inverters QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 8/17/2023 5:43 PM DATE MODIFIED: 8/17/2023 5:44 PM

Page 5